JP2016077860A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: Based on entry of a game ball into operation holes 38, 39 provided in a game area, an opening/closing accessory 168 for enabling winning of an accessory device 150 is opened or closed. The accessory device 150 includes a V winning sensor, and a shift to an opening/closing execution mode is performed when a game ball is detected by the V winning sensor. A distribution member capable of changing a distribution ratio of game balls to a side of the V winning sensor, and an accessory of a rotor are provided within the accessory device 150, and operation of the accessories is performed at predetermined timing. In the Pachinko game machine, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened or closed at first timing or at second timing differing from the first timing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, one having a variable pitching device provided in a gaming area is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-325811 A

  Here, in the gaming machine, a device for increasing the degree of attention to the game is desired.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of attention to a game.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1
A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
Variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can be received and a second state in which the game ball is less likely to be received than the first state;
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means based on occurrence of a predetermined event;
A first passing portion and a second passing portion through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage part, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player;
In the first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage unit side and the second mode in which the game balls are less easily distributed to the first passage unit side than the first mode, A sorting means capable of switching at a predetermined timing;
With
The variable acceptance control means includes
First switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a first timing based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied when the predetermined event occurs;
Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied when the predetermined event occurs. When,
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, the degree of attention to a game can be improved.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) is a perspective view which shows the structure of an accessory apparatus, (b) is a top view which shows simply the structure of the channel | path provided in the accessory apparatus. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows an accessory apparatus. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the rotary body unit which comprises an accessory device. It is a top view which shows a rotary body unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a result table, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a classification table, (c) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an open | release timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting. It is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a control start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during control. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution. It is a flowchart which shows a winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows an opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of each round. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each opening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a round pattern table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an opening / closing pattern table. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the opening / closing pattern and distribution timing in a round. In 2nd Embodiment, (a) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the result table for 1st operation ports, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the result table for 2nd operation ports. . It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the prize-winning timing to an operation port, and distribution timing. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the winning timing to an operation port, and a distribution timing as a modification in 2nd Embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, (a) is a flowchart which shows the setting process of each round, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a round pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing process in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the allocation table of each opening / closing pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening / closing pattern table in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the allocation table of each opening / closing pattern. In 6th Embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the process for the effect performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an opening / closing pattern table, (b) It is a flowchart which shows an open corresponding | compatible process, (c) It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the outline | summary of each special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing process in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the prize-winning timing to an operation port, and distribution timing, (b) is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the outline | summary of each production mode. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing timing setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each open | release timing table. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the prize-winning timing to an operation port, and distribution timing. It is a flowchart which shows the game control process in 9th Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the common pending | holding number and the fluctuation display time of game times, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating duplication with a common pending | holding number and V distribution. . It is a flowchart which shows the normal process in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution. It is a flowchart which shows a control start process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the prize-winning timing to an operation port, and distribution timing. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing timing setting process in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that an open | release pattern is changed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that an open | release pattern is changed. As a modified example of the ninth embodiment, (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table, and (b) is a flowchart showing a setting process of a variable display time.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. In addition, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated rearward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and has a function of making the gaming machine main body 12 locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The front door frame 14 has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  The front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire gaming area described later can be viewed from the front. The window part 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed colorless and transparent with a synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display light emitting part 63 is provided above the window part 61 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 are provided for outputting sound effects according to the game situation.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71.

  A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. When the firing handle 60 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53 provided below the game area in the inner frame 13 toward the game area. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 60, the launch strength of the game ball launched toward the game area, that is, the launch momentum is changed.

  The game area is formed on the game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 24, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In addition, the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide ball 34 for a game ball to the game area, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism when the player rotates the launch handle 60 The guide rail 34 guides the upper part of the game area.

  The guide rail 34 is formed so that the exit portion thereof faces the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is changed from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit portion is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the side of the department. The exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in a range defined as a game area on the game board 24 by router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 35, a first operation opening (first start entry section) 38, a second operation opening (second start entry section) 39, an accessory device 150, a through gate 41, and a variable display unit. 42, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 35, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, and the accessory device 150, a detection sensor (first operating sensor 38a) disposed on the back side of the game board 24 is generated. The second actuation sensor 39c and the inlet sensor 179 (see FIG. 6 and the like)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the first operation port 38 and a ball enters the second operation port 39, 7 prize balls are paid out, and the general game port 35 is entered. When a ball is generated, eight prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the accessory device 150, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls related to the second operation port 39 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operation port 38. The number may be different.

  In addition, an out port 45 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 45. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 46 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area continues to flow down without being included is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 45, the game ball to the accessory device 150, the first operation port 38, the second operation port 39, or the through gate 41 is used. We refer to winning as winning.

  The accessory device 150 is disposed in a substantially central portion of the game board 24. The first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 are juxtaposed in the lateral direction below the accessory device 150 in the game board 24. Two first operation ports 38 are provided on the left and right of the accessory device 150, and the second operation ports 39 are disposed at positions sandwiched by the left and right first operation ports 38. In relation to the accessory device 150, the left and right first operation ports 38 are disposed so as to sandwich the accessory device 150, and a game ball that has not won a prize in the accessory device 150 is one of the first operation ports. It is possible to reach 38 (winning is possible). Further, the lateral distance between both the first operation ports 38 and the accessory device 150 is equal to or larger than the diameter of one game ball, and there is a gap between the first operation port 38 and the accessory device 150. A game ball can flow down.

  The second operating port 39 is disposed below the accessory device 150. The second operation port 39 is disposed slightly below the first operation ports 38, and game balls that have not entered the accessory device 150 or the first operation port 38 can reach the second operation port 39. (Can enter).

  The second working port 39 is provided with an electric accessory 39a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric combination 39a is connected to an electric combination drive unit 39b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric combination drive unit 39b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is arranged in either an open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory 39a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 39, and when the electric accessory 39a is in the open state, it is possible to win the second operating port 39.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a state in which a winning of a game ball to the second operating port 39 is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur than a state in which a winning is not impossible but the above winning is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which the electric accessory 39a is switched. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not have the electric accessory 39a, and is switched by the displacement of the 2nd operation port 39 itself between the state where it is hard to generate | occur | produce a prize and the state where it is hard to generate | occur | produce a prize.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 47 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decoration member 47 extends from the surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 47.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 47. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display unit 43, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the respective operation ports 38 and 39 is clearly indicated by the display of a pattern or the like.

  The main display unit 43 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, the design displayed on the main display unit 43 includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors. The displayed configuration can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 44, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 41 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 41 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 41 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is released, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 39a provided in the second working port 39 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 42 is provided with a symbol display device 51 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol that is a kind of symbol. The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  A first reserved light emitting portion 54 and a second reserved light emitting portion 55 corresponding to the main display portion 43 are provided below the main display portion 43 of the decorative member 47. The first hold light-emitting unit 54 has a plurality of (four in detail) light-emitting units arranged side by side on the left and right, and the maximum number of game balls won in the first operation port 38 is held, and the first hold light-emission is held. The reserved number is displayed by lighting the part 54. The second hold light emitting section 55 is arranged in a plurality of light emitting sections arranged side by side (specifically, four), and the number of game balls won in the second operation port 39 is held up to four, and the second hold light emitting section is held. The reserved number is displayed by lighting the part 55. Further, a third reserved light emitting unit 56 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided below the accessory display unit 44 in the decorative member 47. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 41 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding light emitting unit 56. In addition, the structure etc. by which one part or all part of the pending | holding light emission parts 54-56 are displayed by a part of symbol display apparatus 51 may be sufficient.

  The accessory device 150 is in an open state on the condition that a game ball enters one of the operation ports 38 and 39, and the game ball can enter the accessory device 150. When a game ball enters the accessory device 150 and the game ball enters a V winning opening provided in the accessory device 150, it is detected by a V winning sensor 192, which will be described later, and a big hit state is obtained.

  Here, the configuration of the accessory device 150 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5A is a perspective view of the accessory device 150, FIG. 5B is a plan view schematically showing the configuration of the passage provided in the accessory device 150, and FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body unit 180 constituting the accessory device 150, and FIG. 8 is a plan view of the rotating body unit 180.

  The accessory device 150 is roughly composed of an accessory unit 160 and a rotating body unit 180. As shown in FIG. 6, the accessory unit 160 includes a base frame 161, and a flange 162 of the base frame 161 is fixed to the game board 24 with screws. The base frame 161 is vertically divided by a ball receiving plate 163 extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper opening 164 and a lower opening 165 penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed.

  A ceiling member 167 having a predetermined thickness is attached above the upper opening 164 on the front surface of the base frame 161. Note that the variable display unit 42 is formed on the ceiling member 167, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is installed so as to face the front of the gaming machine.

  On the left and right sides of the upper opening 164 in the base frame 161, a pair of opening / closing accessories 168 having the same thickness as the ceiling member 167 is provided. A passage forming member 171 and a driving unit fixing plate 172 are provided on the back side of the base frame 161, and a pair of opening / closing accessory driving units 173 (electromagnetic solenoids) are attached to the back surface of the driving unit fixing plate 172. Yes. One end of a link 176 provided through the passage forming member 171 and the driving unit fixing plate 172 is connected to the opening / closing member driving unit 173, and the other end of the link 176 is connected to the shaft portion of the opening / closing member 168. It is connected. Accordingly, the opening / closing combination 168 is opened by driving the opening / closing combination driving unit 173.

  The opening operation will be described in detail. Each opening / closing member 168 rises upward when the opening / closing member driving unit 173 is not driven (excited), and the respective leading ends thereof are close to the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. On the other hand, when the opening / closing role driving unit 173 is driven (excited), each opening / closing role 168 opens outward, and a game ball is provided between the front end of each opening / closing role 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. A gap larger than one is created. With this configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the accessory device 150 only when each opening / closing accessory 168 is opened and the accessory device 150 is opened. Note that, even when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is not driven (excited) (when the opening / closing accessory 168 stands up), the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven (excited). As long as it is more difficult to enter the accessory device 150 than when the opening / closing accessory 168 is open to the outside, it is useful when the opening / closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited). The structure which can be entered into the object apparatus 150 may be sufficient. For example, when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven, the gap between the tip of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167 is about one game ball, and the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is A configuration in which the gap becomes larger when driven is conceivable.

  Further, the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is configured to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by the passage forming member 171 and the driving unit fixing plate 172, and the back side of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is covered by the cover member 174. Yes.

  A front frame 175 is attached to the edge of the lower opening 165 on the front surface of the base frame 161. An extension wall 175a formed on the upper portion of the front frame 175 extends above the ball receiving plate 163 of the base frame 161, and the front of the game ball that has reached the ball receiving plate 163 by the extension wall 175a. Jumping out of is regulated.

  A passage plate 177 extending in the front-rear direction and connected to the ball receiving plate 163 is formed in the passage forming member 171, and a game ball passage 178 extending in the up-down direction is formed on the back side of the passage plate 177 (FIG. 5 (b)). Since the passage plate 177 is inclined downward toward the game ball passage 178 and further has a width narrowed toward the game ball passage 178, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving plate 163 is a game ball. Guided to passage 178. The game ball guided to the game ball passage 178 flows down the game ball passage 178. An entrance sensor 179 is provided on the entrance side of the game ball passage 178, and the game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 always and immediately passes through the entrance sensor 179. Thereby, the entrance of the game ball to the accessory device 150 is detected. The entrance sensor 179 is configured by a known proximity sensor.

  A rotary unit 180 is attached to the accessory unit 160 so as to be positioned below the passage forming member 171. As shown in FIG. 7, the rotator unit 180 includes a guide passage forming member 181 and a discharge passage forming member 191.

  The guide passage forming member 181 is formed with a recess 182 that is recessed downward in the approximate center thereof. The recess 182 has a circular shape in plan view. An annular guide passage 183 is formed along the outer edge of the upper surface opening of the recess 182. The guide passage 183 is symmetrical, and is inclined so as to become lower as it goes from the center on the back side toward the center on the near side. The front center of the guide passage 183 is located at the lower end portion of the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161. The center on the back side of the guide passage 183 is located vertically below the game ball passage 178 of the accessory unit 160. The passage wall 183a that forms the back center of the guide passage 183 is taller than the surrounding passage wall 183a, and a passage cover 184 that extends in the horizontal direction is formed above the guide passage 183 on the back side. . However, the passage cover 184 is formed with an inlet opening 184a, and in a plan view (see FIG. 8), the rear side portion of the guide passage 183 has a configuration in which only the rear center is exposed. Since the entrance opening 184 a overlaps the exit of the game ball passage 178, the game ball that has flowed down the game ball passage 178 surely reaches the back center of the guide passage 183.

  A ball sorting portion 185 is formed in the center on the back side of the guide passage 183. The ball distribution unit 185 has an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the center toward both the left and right sides. Accordingly, the game balls that have reached the guide passage 183 are distributed to either the left or right. Then, it rolls along the inclination of the guide passage 183 and is guided to the front side of the guide passage 183. On the front side of the guide passage 183, a lead-out portion 186 that is inclined toward the concave portion 182 is formed.

  The concave portion 182 has a V winning opening 182a formed on the bottom surface thereof. The V winning opening 182a communicates with the V winning path 191a formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 182a is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning path 191a. In this case, a V winning sensor 192 is provided in the V winning path 191a, and a game ball passing through the V winning path 191a is detected by the V winning sensor 192.

  In addition, a release port 182 b is formed on the side surface of the recess 182. The release port 182b communicates with a release passage 191b formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the release port 182b is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the release passage 191b. In this case, a detachment sensor 193 is provided in the detachment passage 191b, and a game ball passing through the detachment passage 191b is detected by the detachment sensor 193. The V winning sensor 192 and the removal sensor 193 are configured by well-known proximity sensors. The game balls discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning path 191a and the detaching path 191b are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge path (not shown).

  A rotating body drive unit 194 is attached to the discharge passage forming member 191 from the lower side, and an output shaft 194 a extending in the vertical direction of the rotating body drive unit 194 includes a discharge passage forming member 191 and a guide passage forming member 181. It penetrates. The rotating body 201 is fixed to the output shaft 194a. The rotating body drive unit 194 may be a stepping motor.

  The rotating body 201 has a substantially disk shape with a slightly smaller diameter than the concave portion 182 of the guide passage forming member 181, and is located in the concave portion 182. The rotating body 201 rotates counterclockwise as the rotating body driving unit 194 is driven. Ten spherical guide portions 202 recessed inward are formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body 201, and these spherical guide portions 202 are arranged at equal intervals. Among these, nine ball guides 202 are bottomed exit guides 203, and one ball guide 202 is a bottomless V prize opening guide 204. The bottom surface of the outlet guide portion 203 is inclined so as to become lower as it goes outward. Each ball guide unit 202 has a size that allows one game ball to enter, and a game ball led out from the lead-out unit 186 of the guide passage 183 enters one of the ball guide units 202. In this case, the game ball that has entered the V winning opening guide 204 reaches the upper portion of the V winning opening 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates, and falls into the V winning passage 191a from the V winning opening 182a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the outlet guide portion 203 reaches the side of the outlet 182b as the rotating body 201 rotates, and enters the outlet passage 191b from the outlet 182b.

  In the present embodiment, a rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided to grasp the rotational position of the rotating body 201. The rotational position detection sensor 196 has a pair of arm portions 196a and 196b facing each other at a predetermined interval. One arm portion 196a is provided with a light emitting element, and the light emitting element in the other arm portion 196b is connected to the light emitting element. A light receiving element is disposed at the opposite position. The rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided on the sensor substrate 197, and the sensor substrate 197 is driven between the arms 196a and 196b of the rotational position detection sensor 196 (between the light emitting element and the light receiving element). It is fixed to the discharge passage forming member 191 so that the cut van 198 provided on the output shaft 194a of the portion 194 is positioned.

  The cut van 198 has a substantially donut shape and rotates as the output shaft 194a rotates. However, the notch 198a is formed so as to be discontinuous. Accordingly, light from the light emitting element of the rotational position detection sensor 196 is basically blocked by the cut van 198, and only from the light emitting element when the cutout part 198a passes between both arm parts 196a and 196b as the output shaft 194a rotates. Light reaches the light receiving element. Then, by forming the notch 198a corresponding to the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 on the outer periphery of the rotating body 201, it is monitored whether or not the light receiving element has detected light from the light emitting element. The rotational position of the rotating body 201 can be grasped. Incidentally, when the V winning opening guide portion 204 passes the front side of the derivation portion 186, the notch portion 198a passes between both arm portions 196a and 196b.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided in the left and right guide passage 183 on the left and right sides of the guide passage 183, more specifically, on the side where the release port 182b is formed. The first distribution member 300 is disposed as a bottom part of the floor portion of the guide passage 183 above the outlet 182 b in the guide passage 183. The 1st distribution member 300 is arrange | positioned in the back | inner side rather than the removal port 182b. The first distribution member 300 is connected to a first distribution drive unit 300a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the first distribution drive unit 300a is driven and controlled, whereby the floor portion of the guide passage 183 is formed. And a non-distributed state that constitutes a part of the first distributed member 300 and a distributed state that rotates downward about the rear end of the first distributing member 300 as a rotation axis and is inclined downward toward the outer opening 182b. .

  With the above configuration, when the first distribution drive unit 300a is not driven (is not in an excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in an undistributed state, the guide passage 183 is leftward. The distributed game balls pass through the first sorting member 300 using the first sorting member 300 as a floor, and reach one of the ball guides 202 in the rotating body 201. On the other hand, when the first distribution driving unit 300a is driven (becomes an excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the first distribution member 300 is inclined toward the lower outlet 182b. The game ball passing over the first sorting member 300 is not guided to the rotating body 201 and is directly guided to the detaching port 182b (the detaching passage 191b). Therefore, the V winning probability (probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) varies depending on the state of the first distribution member 300.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a warp passage 250 is provided for directly guiding the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage 178 to the V winning award passage 191a. The warp passage 250 has a passage region 251 through which one game ball can pass, and the passage region 251 is formed to bend downward and downward. More specifically, the passage wall 183a behind the ball sorting portion 185 in the guide passage 183 is formed with an opening (not shown) that is open toward the rear, and the passage region 251 is formed in the opening. The inlet 252 is in communication. Further, a V guide passage 260 through which one game ball can pass toward the V prize winning passage 191 a is formed on the upper side of the discharge passage forming member 191, and the warp is placed on the rear end portion 261 of the V guide passage 260. An outlet 253 of the passage region 251 in the passage 250 is communicated. The V guide path 260 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the V prize path 191a, and the front end 262 of the V guide path 260 communicates with the V prize path 191a.

  With the above configuration, when the game ball that has reached the guide passage 183 is guided toward the warp passage 250, the game ball passes through the passage region 251 in the warp passage 250 and is led to the V guide passage 260. Then, the game ball passes through the V guide path 260, enters the V winning path 191a, and is detected by the V winning sensor 192 (V winning).

  Here, upstream of the entrance 252 of the warp passage 250 (forward), the flow of game balls into the warp passage 250 is restricted (whether it is distributed to the warp passage 250 or left and right in the guide passage 183). A second sorting member 310 is provided. The second distribution member 310 is connected to a second distribution drive unit 310a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the second distribution drive unit 310a is driven and controlled, so that the inlet 252 of the warp passage 250 is The state is displaced between a non-distributed state disposed in front and a distributed state disposed above and not disposed in front of the inlet portion 252. That is, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not driven (not in an excited state) and is in a non-distributed state, the game ball cannot flow into the warp passage 250, and in the guide passage 183 Sorted to the left and right. On the other hand, when the second distribution driving unit 310a is driven (becomes excited) and is in the distribution state, the game ball can flow into the warp passage 250 (backward). Directly to the V winning path 191a without passing through. That is, the V winning probability (probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) varies depending on the state of the second distribution member 310.

  The ball distribution unit 185 at the center on the back side of the guide passage 183 has a downwardly inclined surface so that the game balls can be distributed not only to the left and right but also to the rear. However, when the second allocating member 310 is in an unallocated state, the second allocating member 310 is arranged on the above-described downward inclined surface. Nevertheless, the occurrence of an event in which the game ball stays there in an attempt to distribute the game ball to the down slope side is suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the period until the game ball won in the accessory device 150 reaches the position to be distributed by the second distribution member 310 (ball distribution unit 185) is about 0.3 sec. The path length is set so that Further, the period until the game ball won in the accessory device 150 reaches the position to be distributed by the first distribution member 300 (on the first distribution member 300) is about 0.5 sec. The passage length is set in

  The game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 described above enters the game ball passage 178 by rolling on the ball receiving plate 163. In this case, the game ball is detected by the entrance sensor 179. The game ball that has flowed down the game ball passage 178 reaches the ball distribution portion 185 formed at the center in the back of the guide passage 183. Then, the second sorting member 310 disposed in the ball sorting unit 185 is sorted to either the left or right guide passage 183 on condition that the second sorting member 310 is in a non-sorted state. And it guide | induces to the derivation | leading-out part 186 by rolling the guide channel | path 183 of the distributed side. The game ball guided to the derivation unit 186 is guided into the recess 182 by rolling along the inclination of the derivation unit 186. However, when the balls are distributed to the left side by the ball distribution unit 185, the first distribution member 300 being in an undistributed state is a condition derived to the concave portion 182 side. That is, the game ball guided to the left guide passage 183 may be led out to the recess 182 side or may be led out to the detaching port 182b as it is.

  In the recess 182, the rotating body 201 is always rotating at a constant speed, and the game ball led out into the recess 182 and entering the exit guide part 203 is guided to the exit 182 b. In this case, the game ball is detected by the removal sensor 193. On the other hand, the game ball led out into the recess 182 and entered the V winning opening guide 204 is guided to the V winning opening 182a. In this case, the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192. And a big hit state generate | occur | produces by detecting by the V winning sensor 192. FIG.

  When the game ball reaches the ball distribution unit 185 and the second distribution member 310 is in the distributed state, the game ball is not only directed to the left or right guide passage 183 but also to the warp passage 250 side. Is distributed. And by being distributed to the warp passage 250 side, it is directly detected by the V winning sensor 192 without passing through the first sorting member 300 and the rotating body 201, and a big hit state is generated.

  Of the ten ball guides 202, only one V winning opening guide 204 is provided, so that the game balls that have entered the concave portion 182 of the accessory device 150 have a 1/10 probability of the V winning opening 182a. Will enter. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the removal sensor 193, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 71. Further, the movement of the game ball on the rotating body unit 180 is visible from the front of the gaming machine through the opening of the front frame 175 and the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161.

  However, the number of ball guides 202 and the number of V winning opening guides 204 are not limited to those described above. For example, one V winning opening guide 204 is provided for six ball guiding units 202, and 1 It is good also as a structure which wins V with the probability of / 6, and it is good also as a structure which wins V with the other probability.

  In the above-mentioned accessory device 150, the power lines and signal lines of the sensors 179, 192, 193, 196, etc. and the drive units 173, 300a, 310a, 194, etc. are relay terminal plates attached to the guide passage forming member 181. 199. These signal lines are bundled as a harness and connected to a main control device which will be described later, and the main control device detects entry and drive control of the drive unit. However, it is good also as a structure which performs these part or all on the side of the production | presentation control apparatus mentioned later which is a control apparatus of a sub side.

  In the symbol display device 51, a notification that a game ball has entered one of the operation ports 38, 39 and the accessory device 150 is in an open state, a notification that a game ball has entered the accessory device 150, Notification of distribution ratio to both distribution members 300, 310, distribution result, notification of distribution status on rotating body 201, notification of occurrence of jackpot state by detecting game ball with V winning sensor 192, etc. In addition to the notification during the normal gaming state, the round effect during the jackpot state is also notified. Note that the contents of these effects are not limited as long as the player can clearly grasp each game situation.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 The connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body are cut. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the board box 83 and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. Between them.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board that controls voice, lamp display, and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the effect control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 is housed and configured.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a synthetic resin having transparency, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81 and the production control device 82 from the rear. ing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. When changing state such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode An output terminal is provided for signal output (or during the transition to the state). And the signal regarding the state of a frame side is output with respect to the management control apparatus of the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 60 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  A main control device 81, an effect control device 82, and a display control device 100 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism unit including a payout device 96, a payout control device 97, a power source and a discharge control. A device 98 is mounted.

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board 111 that manages the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 115 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 81 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its release to a board box that houses the main control board 111 or the like. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation or an adhesive layer to be bonded at the time of peeling The structure which sticks the seal seal | sticker which leaves the trace of having been peeled by remaining so that it may straddle the boundary between several case bodies can be considered. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 112 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 112, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 115 and a payout control device 97 provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 115 is connected to a power source having a function of supplying operating power and the launch control device 98, and the MPU 112 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 115.

  Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various sensors include a general prize opening as a prize detection sensor for detecting a prize at the other winning parts in addition to the first action sensor 38a and the second action sensor 39c for detecting a prize at both the action holes 38 and 39. A sensor 35a for detecting a prize for 35, a sensor 41a for detecting a prize for the through gate 41, and the like are provided. In addition, as various sensors, an entrance sensor 179, a V winning sensor 192, a removal sensor 193, a rotational position detection sensor 196, and the like in the accessory device 150 are included. In the MPU 112, a winning determination (entrance determination) for each winning portion is performed based on the detection results of these various sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196, and the position of the rotating body 201 is determined. To grasp. Further, in the MPU 112, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the first working port 38 or the second working port 39.

  On the output side of the MPU 112, a power failure monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion.

  Various effects commands are output to the effect control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 112, as various driving units, an electric accessory driving unit 39b, an opening / closing accessory driving unit 173, a first distribution driving unit 300a, a second distribution driving unit 310a, a rotating body driving unit 194, and the like. Is connected. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 112 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a winning occurs in any of the operation ports 38 and 39 or when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode based on winning in the V winning sensor 192, the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 of the accessory device 150 is driven. Under the control, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 168 is executed. In these cases, the drive control of both the distribution drive units 300a and 310a is performed, and the drive control of the rotating body drive unit 194 is performed.

  In addition, when the winning / losing lottery based on winning at both the operation ports 38 and 39 is performed, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 112. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 39a is to be opened is clearly indicated, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

  The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power source and launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts output from the power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is the main power supply unit. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

  The power supply and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 53 includes a launch rail that extends toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper plate 71 onto the launch rail, And a solenoid that is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34, and a drive signal is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 98 to the solenoid so that the game ball is Fired.

  The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board 141 on which an MPU 142 is mounted. The MPU 142 includes a ROM 143 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 142 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 143 is executed. A RAM 144, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 142 drives and controls the various light emitting units 54 to 56 and 63 and the speaker unit 64 based on the command received from the main control device 81. Also, a command obtained as a result of analyzing these commands is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control apparatus 100 includes a display control board 151 on which an MPU 152, a video display processor (VDP) 155, a character ROM 156, and a video RAM 157, each of which is an element in which a program ROM 153 and a work RAM 154 are combined into a chip. It has.

  The MPU 152 analyzes various commands received from the effect control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 155 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 155).

  The program ROM 153 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 152 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when holding the stored information. The work RAM 154 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 152, and volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 155 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 155 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 155 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 155 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 152, the video RAM 157, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 157 from the character ROM 156 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 51.

  The character ROM 156 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM 156 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 157 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display contents of the symbol display device 51 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 157.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 112 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 43, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 51, setting the display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot occurrence lottery and the jackpot used to determine the jackpot type such as whether to open / close the opening / closing accessory 168 or the like. An opening type counter CS for setting a waiting period from the winning to the opening state when the opening and closing accessory 168 is set to the opening state based on the winning of the type counter C2 and the operating ports 38 and 39; The random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 39a of the second operating port 39 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each counter C1, C2, CINI, CS, C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 114 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the opening type counter CS is acquired information when a winning to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 occurs. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as a means.

  The reserved ball storage area 114b includes a reserved area RE composed of a first result display area reserved area Ra and a second result display area reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and a lottery counter is selected in accordance with a winning history to the first working port 38 or the second working port 39. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the release type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored as hold information in any area. Note that the hold information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when winning to the first working port 38 or the second working port 39 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four game balls winning histories to the first working port 38 or the second working port 39 are each stored on hold. Further, the reserved ball storage area 114b is provided with a total number-of-holds storage area, and the total number-of-holds storage area stores the number of winning histories stored in the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39. The information for specifying is stored.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area RE when the variable display of the main display unit 43 is started, and at the start of one game round, the execution area AE Based on the various pieces of numerical information stored in the table, the determination of success or failure is performed.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (ie 99), it returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 99). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39. More specifically, the second result of the RAM 114 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display unit reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a result table (game result information group) in the result table storage area 113a as the success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 113.

  Here, the contents of the result table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, in the result table, as a game result, a loss result, a direct hit result, and a normal release result are set. The normal release result is a game result that causes the opening / closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 to be in an open state based on winning in the operating ports 38 and 39. In the present embodiment, when the winning to the first operating port 38 occurs, the opening / closing role 168 is opened once, and when the winning for the second operating port 39 occurs, the opening / closing role 168 is opened twice. It is set to be. The disengagement result is a result that the opening / closing accessory 168 is not in the open state even when a prize is generated in the operation ports 38 and 39. In this case, it is not possible to make a prize for the accessory device 150, and the transition to the big hit state (opening / closing execution mode) cannot be expected. The direct hit result is a result of shifting to the big win state (opening / closing execution mode) only when a winning is made to the operation ports 38 and 39, and of course, even if a winning to the accessory device 150 does not occur. As described above, the jackpot state is entered.

  Of the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 99), the number of random number values that result in losing is one, the number of random number values that result in direct hits is one, and the rest are normal open results. Corresponding value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of opening / closing members 168 corresponding to the operation ports 38 and 39 is opened with a probability of 98/100 based on the winnings of both the operation ports 38 and 39, and 1/100 Although the opening / closing role 168 is not opened with probability, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed without passing the V prize, and the opening / closing role 168 is not opened with the probability of 1/100, and the opening / closing execution mode is entered. There is no migration.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure in which the direct hit result and the loss result are not provided. However, since these results are included, the game can be diversified. Especially, when a direct hit result is provided, a game in which winnings to the accessory device 150 do not frequently occur due to nail adjustment or the like. Even if it is a stand, it can be expected to generate a big hit state, and even with such a game stand, it is possible to expect an effect of increasing the willingness to play.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39. More specifically, the second result of the RAM 114 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display unit reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for setting the type of the jackpot result is stored as a type table (game type information group) in various table storage areas 113d as the success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 113.

  Here, the contents of the type table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, in the type table, a 16R (round) continuation mode and a continuation rate variation mode are set as the types of jackpot results. The 16R continuation mode indicates a mode in which 16 round games are executed, and the continuation rate variation mode indicates a mode in which the continuation rate to the next round game varies in a round game.

  Here, the round game is that (1) the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened for a predetermined upper limit number of times, and (2) the total number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 is determined in advance. It is a game that continues until either one of the conditions is reached. By the way, in this embodiment, the opening / closing role 168 is opened and closed 19 times in one round game, and the upper limit winning number of one round game is set to nine.

  The maximum number of round games to be played in each jackpot type is determined in advance. Specifically, the maximum round game is set to 16 regardless of the jackpot result in any mode. In this case, in the 16R continuation mode, 16 round games are set to be continued unconditionally. On the other hand, in the continuation rate variation mode, the round game is set to continue when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. The continuation condition is that a game ball wins the accessory device 150 during the round game, and that the game ball wins V.

  For example, the open type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. The open type counter CS is periodically updated. However, the update timing is set to be different from the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2. Therefore, it is difficult to perform an illegal act of reading the update timing of each counter value by some method. The updated release type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39, like the other counters C1 and C2. More specifically, the second result of the RAM 114 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display unit reserved area Rb.

  A random number value for setting a waiting time (opening timing) from winning to the operating ports 38 and 39 to opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is stored in the opening timing table storage area 113c as waiting information group storage means in the ROM 113. It is stored as (waiting period information group).

  Here, the contents of the release timing table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11C, a plurality of types of waiting times (waiting periods) from the winning timing (or the previous closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168) to the operating ports 38, 39 are set as the opening timing. ing. More specifically, 20 types of standby time are set in increments of 0.1 sec from 0.5 sec to 2.4 sec. The interval between these times (0.1 sec) is set to be shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec cycle). The act of intentionally changing (raising) the probability is less likely to be performed.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), it returns to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric accessory reservation area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 41.

  Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 39a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 39a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 39a is not controlled to be in an open state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 39a is set so as not to differ regardless of the gaming state. That is, it is easy to win in the open lottery of the electric accessory 39a, or when the win time and the number of open times are large (so-called high frequency support mode), or when the win probability in the open lottery is lower or wins There is no mode such as a state where the time and the number of times of opening are small (so-called low frequency support mode). With these configurations, it is possible to improve the interest because the range of increase and decrease in the number of balls can be increased. On the other hand, in order to adjust the number of balls in the high frequency support mode, There may also be a situation where it is necessary to take specifications such as setting the winning frequency for both the operation ports 38 and 39 to be low. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 is unlikely to occur, and there is a possibility that the willingness to play can be reduced. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by setting the opening mode of the electric accessory 39a regardless of the gaming state, it is possible to expect a winning to the operating ports 38 and 39 to some extent even in the normal gaming state. It is possible to avoid a decrease in willingness to.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed in order to advance the game in the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 112 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 112 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196 are read, and the states of the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196 are read. A process of determining and storing the detection information is executed. Further, when a winning of a game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 179 corresponding to the generation of a prize ball, a prize for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball. Set the sphere command. For example, when the entrance sensor 179 has detected winning in the accessory device 150, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is set. In the subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

  In the subsequent step S104, a through winning process is performed in conjunction with winning through the through gate 41. In the through winning process, if a winning to the through gate 41 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). On the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area 114c. Moreover, the process for lighting the 3rd holding | maintenance light emission part 56 corresponding to the effect holding | maintenance memory | storage number with respect to the production | presentation control apparatus 82 is performed.

  Thereafter, after the winning process for the operation port is executed in step S105, the timer interruption process is terminated. In the winning process for the operating port, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won any of the operating ports 38 and 39. If it is determined that the game has won, numerical information such as the jackpot random number counter C1 at that time And the numerical information is stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a.

  Specifically, the winning process for the operation opening will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 and 14.

  In step S <b> 201, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) at the first operating port 38 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first operating port 38. If it is determined that the game ball has won the first working port 38, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out seven game balls is set. In the subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the first operating port 38. In step S204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is read, and the start reserved storage number RaN stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). In a succeeding step S205, a process of setting the number of times of opening / closing accessory 168 to one is executed. Specifically, a process of setting “1” to the number-of-releases counter provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 is executed. Thereafter, in step S206, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the open type counter CS is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first operation port 38, in step S207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second operation port 39 (starting winning). It is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to. If it is determined that the game ball has won the second operation port 39, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out seven game balls is set in step S208. In the subsequent step S209, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second operation port 39. In step S210, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). In the subsequent step S211, processing for setting the number of times of opening / closing accessory 168 to two is executed. Specifically, a process of setting “2” in the above-mentioned opening number counter is executed. Even if the number of times of opening is set in the processing of step S205 or step S211, there is a possibility that the opening / closing accessory 168 will not be in the open state depending on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 as described above. Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S206, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S207 are NO, that is, if a game ball has not won any of the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39, the main winning process is finished as it is.

  The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S208 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in an external output process S401 of a normal process described later.

  Here, the information acquisition process of step S206 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the start pending storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S210 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). judge. If the start pending storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the corresponding start display storage number N of the corresponding result display area holding area is set in step S302. In addition to incrementing by 1, the value stored in the total pending count storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as common pending count CRN) is incremented by 1.

  In the subsequent step S304, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 and the open type counter CS updated in the normal process described later is used in the corresponding result display area reserved area. The first storage area among the storage area areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored.

  That is, when the start reserved memory number RaN for the first working port is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the open type counter CS are set to the holding area Ra for the first working port. Is stored in the first storage area, that is, the reserved area Ra corresponding to the start reserved memory number RaN for the first working port incremented by 1 in step S302.

  Further, when the start holding storage number RbN for the second working port is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the open type counter CS are set to the holding area Rb for the second working port. In the first storage area, that is, the reserved area Rb corresponding to the start reserved memory number RbN for the second working port incremented by 1 in step S302. After the process of step S304 is executed, the information acquisition process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. In addition, if an effect command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  Next, in step S402, the open type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the open type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the release type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

  In a succeeding step S403, a game control process for advancing the game is executed. In this game control process, drive control of each drive unit of the accessory device 150 based on winning in the operation ports 38 and 39 is performed.

  After executing the game control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, and the game state transition process is executed. With this gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to the opening / closing execution mode. Details of the game control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

  In a subsequent step S405, a power combination support process for driving and controlling the motor combination 39a provided in the second working port 39 is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role release of whether or not to make the electric accessory 39a open using the numerical information acquired from the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric charge holding area 114c of the RAM 114. A lottery is performed, and when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 39a is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric character release lottery.

  Thereafter, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 98. . Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In subsequent step S407, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the release type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114. In step S409, the open type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the open type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the open type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The open type counter CS can also be updated at random.
<Game control processing>
Next, the game control process of step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game control process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. To do. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the opening / closing execution mode, the game control process is executed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game start process of steps S503 to S506 and the game progression process of steps S507 to S509. Exit. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game starts (the accessory device triggered by the winning of the operating ports 38, 38 regardless of whether or not a winning is generated in the operating ports 38, 39). 150).

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the accessory device 150 is in the control state. Whether or not it is in the controlled state includes a period of opening / closing operation of the accessory device 150 based on winning in the operation ports 38 and 39. The determination as to whether or not it is in the control state is determined to be in the control state on the condition that the character control in progress flag storage area in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is stored. To do. The above-mentioned accessory control in-progress flag is stored when the game result based on winning in the operation ports 38 and 39 is the release result (in this embodiment, the normal release result), and the accessory device 150 based on the result is stored. It is erased at the end of the operation (including the waiting period after closing).

  If the accessory device 150 is not in the controlled state, the process proceeds to the game start process in steps S503 to S506. In the game start process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN is “0”. The case where the common reserved number CRN is “0” means that the start reserved memory numbers RaN and RbN are “0” for both the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39. Therefore, the game control process is terminated as it is. If the common reserved number CRN is not “0”, the data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb in step S504 is set for variable display. In step S505, whether or not to determine the game result of the data set in the data setting process is executed, and in step S506, the accessory device 150 is controlled. After executing the control start process to be started, the game control process is ended.

  Here, the data setting process in step S504, the success / failure determination process in step S505, and the control start process in step S506 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S607 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S608 to S613.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb, the second result display area corresponding to the second operation port 39 is used. The hold information stored in the hold area Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display portion, first, in step S602, the first start hold storage number RaN of the first result display portion hold area Ra is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S603, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  After that, in step S605, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the subsequent step S606, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If it is stored, it is erased, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display portion flag specifies whether the current determination result corresponds to the hold information of the first result display portion reservation area Ra or the second result display portion reservation area Rb. Information.

  In subsequent step S607, a command at the time of shifting (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the presentation control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the first operating port 38. A shift command including information indicating that it corresponds is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). In the effect control device 82, based on the received command at the time of shift, a process for changing the display on the first hold light emitting unit 54 in accordance with the decrease in the hold number is executed.

  In the data setting process for the second result display portion, first, in step S608, the second start hold storage number RbN of the second result display portion hold area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S609, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S610, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the storage area of 2nd result display part holding | maintenance area Rb in step S611 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the subsequent step S612, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if stored, the state is maintained.

  In subsequent step S613, a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the presentation control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the second operating port 39. The command at the time of shift including the information indicating that the command is being performed is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S613 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). In the effect control device 82, based on the received command at the time of shift, a process for changing the display on the second hold light emitting unit 55 in correspondence with the decrease in the hold number is executed.

  Next, the success / failure determination process of step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S701, with reference to the data shifted to the current execution area AE (big hit random number counter C1) and the result table of the ROM 113, it is determined whether or not the current game result is a direct hit result. If it is a direct hit result, the process proceeds to step S702, and a process of storing the V winning flag in the various flag storage areas 114e is executed. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp the occurrence of the release execution mode.

  In the subsequent step S703, the direct hit command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. In step S703, a process of switching the display on the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to the direct hit is executed. Thereafter, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

  The direct hit command set in step S703 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for starting the opening / closing execution mode based on the received direct hit command.

  If it is not a direct hit result in step S701, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, with reference to the data shifted to the current execution area AE (big hit random number counter C1) and the result table of the ROM 113, it is determined whether or not the current game result is an outlier result. If the result is a disengagement result, the process proceeds to step S705, and the value set in the number-of-opens counter in step S205 or step S211 in the above-described winning operation for the operation opening (FIG. 13) is cleared to “0”.

  In step S706, the detach command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. In step S706, a process of switching the display on the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to the result of detachment is executed. Thereafter, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

  The disconnect command set in step S706 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes processing for notifying that the accessory device 150 is not in an open state based on the received detachment command.

  If it is not an outlier result in step S704, a normal release command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S707. In step S704, a process of switching the display on the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to the normal release result is executed. Thereafter, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

  The normal release command set in step S707 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the accessory device 150 is in an open state based on the received normal release command.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the result of the determination (game result) is immediately notified based on the winning at the operation ports 38 and 39.

  Next, the control start process of step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the control start process, first, in step S801, referring to the opening number counter in the RAM 114, a process for grasping the opening number of the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed. In a succeeding step S802, an opening / closing timing setting process is executed. In the opening / closing timing setting process, among the data shifted to the execution area AE in the data setting process (FIG. 17), the data related to the opening timing, that is, the value of the opening type counter CS, and the opening timing table stored in the ROM 113. , And the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is set. Specifically, from this process, a numerical value corresponding to how many seconds later the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened (whether to start driving control of the opening / closing agent driving unit 173) is read from the opening timing table, and the RAM 114 The data is input to a standby counter provided in the various counter areas 114d. This standby counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and when it becomes a predetermined value (for example, “0”), it is possible to grasp the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168.

  In a succeeding step S803, a first distribution setting process is executed. In the first distribution setting process, the first distribution member 300 is placed in a distribution state at a timing when a predetermined first period (0.0 sec) has elapsed from the opening timing set in step S802. Then, the first sorting member 300 is set to be in a non-sorted state at a timing when a predetermined second period (1.5 sec) has passed.

  In step S804, the second distribution setting process is executed, and then this control start process is terminated. In the second sorting setting process, the second sorting member 310 is placed in a sorting state at a timing when a predetermined third period (1.8 sec) has elapsed from the opening timing set in step S802. Then, the second distribution member 310 is set to be in an undistributed state at a timing when a predetermined fourth period (0.1 sec) has elapsed.

  These timings can be grasped by the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Specifically, in step S803 and step S804, first, a value corresponding to the first and third periods (a value corresponding to the timing of displacement from the unallocated state to the allocated state) is assigned to the corresponding distribution counter. input. These distribution counters are updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle and become a predetermined value (for example, “0”), whereby the displacement (non-distribution state → distribution state) timing of the corresponding distribution member 300, 310 Can be understood. Then, in the distribution process (FIG. 21) described later, the distribution members 300 and 310 are displaced (drive control of the drive units 300a and 310a), and the value corresponding to the period during which the distribution state is maintained is It is input to the distribution counter. Thereafter, when the distribution counter reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to grasp the timing of the displacement again (allocation state → non-allocation state).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are displaced is uniquely determined. More specifically, the opening / closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is opened. A period from the timing until each of the sorting members 300 and 310 is displaced is determined.

  In addition, about the said 1st-4th period, the period when each distribution member 300,310 will be in the distribution state is the period when the game ball which entered the accessory apparatus 150 can reach the distribution member 300,310 It is set to become.

  Next, the game progress process in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described. As described above, the game progress process is a process performed when it is determined in step S502 that the accessory device 150 is in the control state. That is, if the control state is in step S502, the in-control process is executed in step S507, the distribution process is executed in step S508, and the winning process is executed in the subsequent step S509. The game control process is terminated.

  First, the in-control processing of step S507 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S901, it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. In this determination, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is the opening timing by referring to the value of the standby counter set in step S802. If it is the opening timing in step S901, an opening control process is executed in step S902. In this process, the opening / closing combination driving unit 173 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing combination 168 to the open state. In step S902, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current open period (2 sec in the present embodiment) to the open period counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The opening period counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and when it becomes a predetermined value (for example, “0”), it is possible to grasp the closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168.

  In step S903, a process of subtracting “1” from the number-of-opens counter of the RAM 114 is executed, and then the process under control is terminated.

  If it is not the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in step S901, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether it is the closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. In this process, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is the closing timing by referring to the value of the open period counter input in step S902. If it is the closing timing in step S904, a closing control process is executed in step S905. In this process, the opening / closing combination 168 is displaced to the closed state by ending the drive control of the opening / closing combination driving unit 173.

  In a succeeding step S906, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times of opening is “0” with reference to the number of times of opening of the RAM 114. If it is “0”, a control end process is executed in step S907. In this process, a process for ending the control of the accessory device 150 for one piece of hold information is performed. More specifically, the presence / absence of an error in each of the drive units 173, 300a, 310a, and 194 is confirmed, and the return process to the initial position is performed. In the subsequent step S908, the control end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the in-control process is terminated.

  The control end command set in step S908 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the control of the accessory device 150 is ended based on the received control end command.

  If the number of releases is not “0” in step S906, a standby period setting process is executed in step S909. In the standby period setting process, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current standby period (1 sec uniformly in this embodiment) to the standby period counter of the RAM 114 is executed.

  If it is not the closing timing in step S904, after executing the process of step S908, or after executing the process of step S909, the in-control process is terminated.

  Next, the distribution process in step S508 in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether it is the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300 or not. This determination can be confirmed by referring to the value of the first distribution counter in the RAM 114 as described above. If it is the displacement timing, the first distribution control process is executed in step S1002. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the first distribution driving unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. Further, when the first distribution driving unit 300a is not in the driving state, driving is started, and the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state. When the distribution state is set, a value corresponding to the second period is input to the first distribution counter.

  In step S1002, if the current control corresponds to opening twice (opening based on winning in the second operating port 39), in the same manner as the processing in step S803, from the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, The first sorting member 300 is placed in a sorting state at a timing when a predetermined first period elapses, and the first sorting member 300 is not sorted at a timing when a predetermined second period elapses therefrom. Set to state. Note that the period from when the first sorting member 300 is displaced from the sorted state to the unsorted state until the second opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is also referred to as a fifth period. In the present embodiment, the fifth period is set to 1.0 sec.

  If it is not the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300 in step S1001, or after executing the process of step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S <b> 1003, it is determined whether it is the displacement timing of the second sorting member 310. This determination can be confirmed by referring to the value of the second distribution counter in the RAM 114 as described above. If it is the displacement timing, the second distribution control process is executed in step S1004. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the second distribution driving unit 310a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is ended, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distributed state to the undistributed state. Displace. In addition, when the second distribution driving unit 310a is not in the driving state, driving is started, and the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state. When the distribution state is set, a value corresponding to the fourth period is input to the first distribution counter.

  In step S1004, if the current control corresponds to opening twice (opening based on winning in the second operating port 39), the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is determined in the same manner as in step S804. The second sorting member 310 is placed in a sorting state at the timing when a predetermined third period has elapsed, and the second sorting member 310 is not sorted at a timing when a predetermined fourth period has passed therefrom. Set to state. Note that the period from when the second distributing member 310 is displaced from the distributed state to the non-distributed state until the second opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is also referred to as a sixth period. In the present embodiment, this sixth period is set to 0.6 sec.

  When it is not the displacement timing of the second distribution member 310 in step S1003, or after the process of step S1004 is executed, the distribution process ends.

  Next, the winning process of step S509 in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 1101, a detection signal from the entrance sensor 179 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the accessory device 150. If a prize has been won, an in-item prize command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S1102. Thereafter, the in-control process is terminated.

  The prize winning command set in step S1102 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). In the effect control device 82, based on the received prize winning command, a notification that a winning in the accessory device 150 has occurred (notification for paying attention to the operation of the game ball in the accessory device 150) is performed. Execute the process for

  When the entrance sensor 179 is not in the detection state in step S1101 (including winning already), or after executing the process of step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, the detection signal from the V winning sensor 192 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not a V winning has occurred. When a V winning is generated, in step S1104, a V winning flag is stored in the RAM 114 to store that a big hit state (shift to the opening / closing execution mode) occurs. In step S1105, a control end process is executed. In step S1106, a control end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  The process in step S1105 is the same as the process in step S907. Further, the control end command set in the process of step S1106 may be the same as the command of step S908, or may include information indicating that a V winning has occurred. Even in the same manner as the command in step S908, a command for that purpose is output at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, so that the production control device 82 can grasp the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and suppress the increase in the number of commands. Is possible. On the other hand, if the command in step S1106 includes information indicating that a V prize has occurred, the effect control device 82 can quickly grasp the event, and an effect that congratulates the V prize, It becomes possible to perform at a timing closer to the V winning timing of the game ball.

  If the V winning is not detected in step S1103, or after the processing of step S1106 is executed, the main winning process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S404 in the normal processing (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the current game result corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a V winning flag is stored in the RAM 114. If the V winning flag is not stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If the V winning flag is stored, an opening / closing execution mode start process is executed in step S1203. In the start process, an opening standby time (start standby period) is set for waiting without opening the opening / closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 for opening in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed.

  In subsequent step S1204, a type determination process for determining the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the current execution area AE, the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is set to 16R continuation mode by referring to the type table in the ROM 113. Or the continuation rate variation mode.

  In subsequent step S1205, based on the processing result in step S1204, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode. If it is the 16R continuation mode, continuation flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1206. The continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp that the current opening / closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode.

  If it is not the 16R continuation mode in step S1205, or after executing the process of step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, “15” is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and “19” is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d. . The first round counter RC1 is a counter for counting the number of round games in one opening / closing execution mode, and the second round counter RC2 counts the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in one round game. It is a counter for doing.

  After executing the processing in step S1207, an opening command is set in step S1208. The set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This opening command includes information on whether the mode is the 16R continuation mode or the continuation rate variation mode. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. In the display control device 100, based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control of the symbol display device 51 is performed so that display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  In subsequent step S1209, after executing the external signal setting process, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot is generated in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what happened.

  On the other hand, if it is in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, and the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the opening standby time has elapsed, an opening / closing process is executed in step S1211.

  Here, the opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, it is determined in step S1301 whether the opening / closing accessory 168 is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173. If the opening / closing accessory 168 is not being opened, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0” in step S1302, and timers provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 in step S1303. It is determined whether the value of the counter T is “0”.

  When the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0” or when the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the present opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter RC1 is not “0” and the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1304, and setting processing for each round is executed.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25, the setting process for each round is first determined in step S1401 as to whether or not the start timing of the current setting process is the start timing of each round. Specifically, when the second round counter RC2 is “0”, it is determined that it is the start timing of each round. If it is not the start timing, the present setting process is terminated.

  In a succeeding step S1402, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode. If the continuation flag is not stored and the current opening / closing execution mode is the continuation rate variation mode, the number of rounds grasping process is executed in step S1403. In this process, it is grasped by referring to the value of the first round counter RC1 how many games the round set in the current round setting process is in the opening / closing execution mode. In step S1404, the round pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the round pattern table defines the open / close pattern for each round in one open / close execution mode. A plurality of types of opening / closing patterns of the opening / closing combination 168 in each round are set, and an opening / closing pattern A, an opening / closing pattern B, and an opening / closing pattern C are set.

  As already described, in the 16R continuation mode, the round game continues unconditionally up to the 16th round. On the other hand, in the continuation rate variation mode, when the continuation condition is satisfied, the next round is continued. The continuation condition is that a game ball wins the accessory device 150 during a round game and that game ball wins a V.

  In the present embodiment, the continuation rate of each round in the continuation rate variation mode is changed by changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 of each round. More specifically, the opening / closing pattern A is easier to continue than B and C. Note that when the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern C are compared, the probability of V winning may vary depending on the timing of entering the game ball.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, in the open / close pattern table stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113, the open / close mode differs depending on how many times the open / close patterns A to C of each round are opened. Is set to

  For example, in the opening / closing pattern A, during 19 times of opening in one round game, the number of times of opening from the first time to the 16th time (RC2 = 1 to 16) is longer than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec) ( 3 times), 1.8 seconds are opened, and then 0.5 seconds are closed (also referred to as opening / closing pattern A1). In the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), the opening is performed for 1.0 sec, and then the closing is performed for 4.0 sec (also referred to as opening / closing pattern A2). In other words, in the case of A1, a prize for the accessory device 150 is relatively easily generated in relation to the firing cycle, and in the case of A2, it can be generated but is less likely to occur than A1.

  As for the opening / closing pattern B, in the first to tenth opening times (RC2 = 1 to 10), the opening is performed for 0.2 sec, and then the closing is performed for 2.1 sec (also referred to as opening / closing pattern B1). In the 11th to 13th times (RC2 = 11 to 13), the opening is performed for 1.0 sec, and then the closing is performed for 1.3 sec (also referred to as opening / closing pattern B2). The 14th to 16th times (RC2 = 14 to 16) are the same as the opening / closing pattern B1. The 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19) are opened for 0.2 sec and then closed for 4.8 sec (also referred to as open / close pattern B3). In other words, in the case of B1 and B3, the winning combination to the accessory device 150 hardly occurs in relation to the firing cycle, and in the case of B2, the winning can occur at a level substantially equal to A2.

  As for the opening / closing pattern C, in the first to sixteenth opening times (RC2 = 1 to 16), the opening is performed for 0.2 sec and then the closing is performed for 2.1 sec (also referred to as the opening / closing pattern C1). The open / close pattern C1 is the same open / close pattern as the open / close pattern B1. In the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), the opening is performed for 1.0 sec, and then the closing is performed for 4.0 sec (also referred to as opening / closing pattern C2). The open / close pattern C2 is the same open / close pattern as the open / close pattern A1. In other words, in the case of C1, almost no prize is awarded to the accessory device 150, and in the case of C2, it is the same as A2.

  Thus, the opening / closing patterns differ depending on the opening / closing patterns A to C set in each round. Further, even in the same round, the opening / closing mode differs depending on how many times the opening / closing is performed.

  On the other hand, about the operation | movement of the distribution members 300 and 310, the operation | movement aspect is the same aspect in any round.

  Specifically, with respect to the first distribution member 300, the opening / closing member 168 is opened at the first to tenth opening times (RC2 = 1 to 10) regardless of the opening / closing pattern A to C. After the period TA1 (0.0 sec) from the start, the state is displaced to the distribution state, and after the period TA2 (0.1 sec), the state is displaced to the non-distribution state, and then the period TA3 (1.3 sec) is not changed. The distribution state is maintained (also referred to as operation pattern VA1). In the 11th to 16th times (RC2 = 11 to 16), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the distribution state after the period TA4 (0.0 sec) from the start of opening, and after the period TA5 (1.0 sec) from the displacement, After being displaced to the distributed state, the non-distributed state is maintained over TA6 (1.3 sec) (also referred to as operation pattern VA2). The 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19) are not displaced in the undistributed state (also referred to as operation pattern VA3).

  As for the second distribution member 310, in any opening / closing pattern A to C, in the first to sixteenth opening times (RC2 = 1 to 16), the second distribution member 310 is not displaced in an undistributed state (operation pattern). Also referred to as VB1). In the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), the opening / closing member 168 is displaced to the distribution state after the period TB1 (1.0 sec) from the start of opening, and after the period TB2 (0.1 sec) from the displacement, After being displaced to the distributed state, the non-distributed state is maintained over TB3 (3.9 sec) (also referred to as operation pattern VB2).

  Here, in each round game in the opening / closing execution mode, the total operation period of the opening time and closing time at each opening / closing (RC2) is predetermined. That is, in any opening / closing pattern, the operation period at the first to 16th opening / closing (RC2 = 1 to 16) is the first operation period (2.3 sec), and the 17th to 19th (RC2 = The operation period at the time of opening and closing of 17 to 19) is the second operation period (5.0 sec).

  Further, the operation pattern of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 in the opening / closing execution mode does not change in relation to the opening / closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 of the opening / closing member 168. That is, in any opening / closing pattern, the first distribution member 300 operates in the operation pattern of VA1 during the first to tenth opening / closing (RC2 = 1 to 10), and the 11th to 16th (RC2 = 11 to 16), the VA2 operation pattern is operated. The 17th to 19th operation (RC2 = 17 to 19) is operated with the VA3 operation pattern. The second distribution member 310 operates in the VB1 operation pattern during the first to sixteenth opening / closing (RC2 = 1 to 16), and VB2 is operated during the seventeenth to nineteenth opening (RC2 = 17 to 19). Operates with an operation pattern.

  In other words, the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is 23.0 sec (0 sec to 23.0 sec, 2.3 sec × 10 times) after the start of one round game (at the first release of the round game). VA1 is switched to VA2, and 36.8 sec (23.0 sec to 36.8 sec, 23.0 sec + 2.3 sec × 6 times) after the start of the same round game is switched to VA2 to VA3. The operation of VA3 continues until 51.8 sec (36.8 sec to 51.8 sec, 36.8 sec + 5.0 sec × 3 times).

  The operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is VB1 after 36.8 seconds (from 0 sec to 36.8 sec, 2.3 sec × 16 times) after the start of one round game (at the first release of the round game). Is switched from VB2 to VB2, and the operation of VB2 continues until 51.8 sec (36.8 sec to 51.8 sec, 36.8 sec + 5.0 sec × 3 times).

  That is, the operation pattern of each sorting member 300, 310 is uniquely determined in each round.

  The relationship between the open / close patterns A to C and the operation patterns of the respective sorting members will be described in more detail. If the open / close pattern A is used, a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150 during A1 (RC2 = 1 to 16). It is relatively easy to occur, and in addition, it is easy to win a V prize (difficult to be distributed to the off side) during VA1 (RC2 = 1 to 10). On the other hand, even if it is between A1 (RC2 = 1-16), between VA2 (RC2 = 11-16) is less likely to win V than VA1 (it is easy to be distributed to the out side). During this A1, the distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed (VB1). In the opening / closing pattern A, when it becomes A2 (RC2 = 17 to 19), although winning to the accessory device 150 is less likely to occur than A1, the first allocating member 300 does not distribute to the disengagement side. (VA3), and distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 may occur (VB2). In other words, in the round of the open / close pattern A, in any period (RC2 = 1 to 19), the occurrence of the V prize can be expected relatively, and the possibility of continuing the round is high.

  In the case of the opening / closing pattern B, during the period B1 (RC2 = 1 to 10), although winning to the accessory device 150 does not substantially occur, if the winning occurs, the first sorting member 300 swings to the losing side. It is difficult to separate (VA1). When it becomes B2 (RC2 = 11-13), a winning to the accessory device 150 can occur, but the first sorting member 300 is likely to be assigned to the losing side (VA2). While B1 and VA2 (RC2 = 14 to 16), almost no prizes are awarded to the accessory device 150, and even if a prize is won, the prizes are easily distributed to the losing side. When it becomes B3 (RC2 = 17-19), although winning to the accessory device 150 does not substantially occur, the first allocating member 300 does not distribute to the off side (VA3), and the second allocation The distribution to the V winning side by the member 310 may occur (VB2). That is, according to the relationship between the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the operation of the allocating members 300 and 310, if the opening / closing pattern B is a round, a V winning is generated during the period B2 (RC2 = 11 to 13). If not, the possibility of V winning is low in other periods, and the possibility of continuing the round is low.

  In the case of the opening / closing pattern C, winnings to the accessory device 150 hardly occur during C1 (RC2 = 1 to 16). However, if it happens, while it is VA1 (RC2 = 1 to 10). ) Is easier to win V than when it is VA2 (RC2 = 11-16). On the other hand, if it becomes C2 (RC2 = 17-19), the winning for the accessory device 150 is more likely to occur than C1, and further, the first distribution member 300 does not distribute to the disengagement side (VA3). Then, the distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 may occur (VB2). In other words, from the relationship between the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the operation of the sorting members 300 and 310, if the opening / closing pattern C is a round, V winning is hardly generated in the period C1, but in the period C2. We can expect the occurrence of the V prize and we can expect the continuation of the round.

  As described above, in this embodiment, although the operation patterns of the sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 are the same in each round, the ease of continuing the round is different depending on the opening / closing pattern of each round (RC1). To do. Also, the easiness of continuing the round (ease of winning a V prize) varies depending on the number of times of opening and closing in each round (RC2).

  Returning to the description of the setting process for each round (FIG. 25), after referring to the round pattern table in step S1404, a process for setting a corresponding round opening / closing pattern is executed in step S1405. Specifically, various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are provided with flag storage areas corresponding to the patterns A to C. For example, in the case of the opening / closing pattern A, the flags are stored in the corresponding areas.

  When the continuation flag is stored in step S1402, or after executing the process of step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, “9” is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The winning counter PC indicates the number of winnings in one round game. In the present embodiment, when nine game balls win the accessory device 150 in one round game, the round game ends. In step S1407, a process of setting “19” to the second round counter RC2 is executed, and then this setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 24), after executing the process of step S1304, the setting process for each opening is executed in step S1305.

  In each opening setting process, specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, it is first determined in step S1501 whether or not a continuation flag is stored. This process is the same as the process in step S1402. If the continuation flag is stored, in the subsequent step S1502, the current round opening / closing pattern is set to A1. That is, in the 16R continuous mode, the open / close pattern of the pattern having the longest open time is set in all rounds (RC1) and in all open times (RC2). Therefore, in the 16R continuation mode, it is easy to generate the maximum number of winnings in each round. In the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 16R continuation mode, the game continues to the next round even if V winning is not achieved (even if the continuation condition is not satisfied).

  If the continuation flag is not stored in step S1501 and the continuation rate variation mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, the second round counter RC2 is grasped, and it is grasped how many times the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is released in one round. In step S1504, the open / close pattern table is referenced from the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113, and the corresponding open / close patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 are set in step S1505.

  In the subsequent step S1506, processing for setting the operation pattern of the sorting members 300 and 310 corresponding to the value of the current second round counter RC2 is executed. In this process, the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter provided in the RAM 114 are used. Then, with reference to the open / close pattern table, the operation patterns of the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310 are grasped, and values corresponding to the timing of displacement from the non-distributed state to the distributed state are respectively input. As described above, these distribution counters are updated (subtracted) at a predetermined period and become a predetermined value (for example, “0”), so that the displacement of the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310 (non-distributed state → It is possible to grasp that it is the timing of distribution). Then, in the closing process (step S1321) and the closing time setting process (step S1324 and step S1325), which will be described later, the displacement members 300 and 310 are displaced (allocated state → unallocated state), and non-allocated. A value corresponding to the period during which the minute state is maintained is input to the distribution counter. Thereafter, when the distribution counter reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to grasp the timing of the displacement again (non-allocation state → allocation state).

  After executing the process of step S1502, or after executing the process of step S1506, in step S1507, a process of subtracting “1” from the second round counter RC2 is executed, and then this setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 24), after the setting process for each opening is executed in step S1305, the opening process is executed in step S1306. Specifically, drive control of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is started, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened. In step S1307, an opening command is set, and the opening / closing process is terminated. The set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). In this release command, in addition to the information on whether or not it is the 16R continuation mode, how many rounds are open (information of the first round counter RC1), and how many times are open in one round (second) Information on the round counter RC2) and information on the open / close patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2. In the effect control device 82, based on the received release command, an effect of notifying the opening / closing pattern, the winning rate to the accessory device 150, the level of the V winning rate when the winning to the accessory device 150 is generated, and the like. The contents are determined, and various devices are controlled so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the opening / closing accessory 168 is open, the process advances to step S1308 to determine whether the value of the timer counter T is “0”. If the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not a game ball is won in the accessory device 150 based on the detection state of the entrance sensor 179. If no winning has occurred, the open / close process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by “1” in step S1310, and then in step S1311, whether or not a V winning has occurred is detected by the V winning sensor 192. Judgment by

  In step S1311, if a V prize has occurred, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not a continuation flag is stored, and it is determined whether or not the 16R continuation mode is an opening / closing execution mode. If no V prize has occurred in step S1311, or if the 16R continuation mode is in step S1312, the process proceeds to step S1313, and it is determined whether or not the prize counter PC is “0”. . If it is not “0” and the maximum number of winnings in one round has not been reached, the present opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  When the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S1308, or when the winning counter PC is “0” in step S1313, a V winning is generated in the continuation rate variation mode in step S1312. In this case, each process for closing the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed in steps S1314 to S1328.

  That is, if the winning counter PC is “0” in step S1313 and the maximum number of winnings has been reached, it is determined in step S1314 whether a continuation flag is stored. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1312. If the continuation flag is not stored and the continuation rate variation mode is set, a process of clearing the first round counter RC1 to “0” is executed in step S1315. This process is a process for ending the opening / closing execution mode when the maximum number of winnings in the round game is reached without generating a V prize in the continuation rate variation mode.

  On the other hand, if the timer counter T is “0” in step S1308, or if the winning counter PC is “0” in the 16R continuation mode in step S1314, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, a process of subtracting “1” from the second round counter RC2 is executed. In step S1317, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 is “0”. If a V prize is generated in the continuation rate variation mode in step S1312, a process of clearing the second round counter RC2 to “0” is executed in step S1318. This process is a process for ending the round game when a V prize is generated during the round game in the continuation rate variation mode.

  When it is determined in step S1317 that the second round counter RC2 is “0”, or after the processing in step S1318 is executed, the first round counter RC1 is set in step S1319, assuming that one round is completed. A process of subtracting “1” is executed. In step S1320, a process of storing a round update flag in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is executed. The round update flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to recognize that each process for closing this time is a process corresponding to the end of one round.

  When the process of step S1315 is performed (when the maximum number of winnings in one round is reached without generating a V winning in the continuation rate variation mode), the second round counter RC2 is not “0” in step S1317 When any of the processes in step S1320 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1321. In step S1321, a closing process is executed. In this process, the drive control of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is terminated, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is brought into a closed state.

  Then, in step S1322, it is determined whether or not the first round counter RC1 is “0” and is the final round in the opening / closing execution mode. If the first round counter RC1 is not “0”, the process advances to step S1323 to determine whether or not the round update flag is stored. If the round update flag is stored and each process for closing this time is a process corresponding to the end of one round, the process proceeds to step S1324.

  In step S1324, a process for setting a closing time (closing period, waiting period) between rounds is executed. In this processing, a numerical value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 sec) is input to the timer counter T.

  On the other hand, the round update flag is not stored in step S1323, and each process for closing this time corresponds to each opening (closing) in one round (corresponding to the second round counter RC2). In the case, the process proceeds to step S1325. In step S1325, a setting process for each opening closing time (closing period, standby period) is executed. In this process, by referring to the value of the second round counter RC2 and the above opening / closing pattern table, the current closing time (closing period, waiting period) is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to that time is set to the timer counter. Input to T.

  After performing the process of step S1324 or step S1325, a close command is set in step S1326, and this open / close process is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This closing command includes information on whether each process for closing this time corresponds to the end of one round or each opening / closing operation in one round. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to each of the above information based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If it is determined in step S1322 that the first round counter RC1 is “0”, an ending start process is executed in step S1327. In the start process, a waiting time for ending in the opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in a waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114. In this case, the waiting time information differs depending on the type of opening / closing execution mode (16R continuation mode or continuation rate variation mode), and the 16R continuation mode has a longer ending waiting time than the continuation rate variation mode. Wait time information is set. In the continuation rate variation mode, the waiting time information is set so that the ending waiting time becomes longer as the opening / closing execution mode continues (the number of round games is larger). In this way, even if the opening / closing execution mode is completed with a small number of round games, it is possible to quickly move to the next game, and expect the next opening / closing execution mode to occur. It is possible to change the player's feelings. In other words, by increasing the waiting time for ending as the number of round games increases in the current opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to lengthen the time that the player is immersed in a sense of superiority. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by “1” every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed.

  Then, after setting an ending command in step S1328, the opening / closing process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This ending command includes information on the waiting time for ending set in step S1327, the type of opening / closing execution mode, the number of continuations of the round game, and the like. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the end of the opening / closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. In the display control device 100, based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control of the symbol display device 51 is performed so that display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 23), after performing the opening / closing process in step S1211, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”, and the process proceeds to step S1213. To determine whether the ending waiting time has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1214. In this process, a process for returning the game state after the opening / closing execution mode to the normal game state (normal game state) is performed. For example, the sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 are arranged at the initial position.

  As the normal gaming state, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 changes (for example, the opening / closing mode that makes it easier to win the second operating port 39 than in other states). And a game state in which the type and probability of a game result at the time of winning a prize to the operation ports 38 and 39 changes (for example, the probability that a direct hit result changes), etc. It is good to set it as those game states in the transfer process.

  After the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S1214 is completed, the termination process of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1215, and then the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the end process of the opening / closing execution mode, the continuation flag used during the opening / closing execution mode is deleted. In step S1215, information indicating that one opening / closing execution mode has ended is externally output, for example, by stopping the jackpot signal output in 1209. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the start and end of one opening / closing execution mode in the hall computer of the game hall.

  The relationship between the open / close patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, C1 to C2 in the open / close execution mode and the operation timings of the sorting members 300 and 310 in this embodiment is described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. explain. Refer to FIG. 28 again for details of each open / close pattern.

  When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA1 (RC2 = 1 to 10), the non-distributed state is changed to the distributed state at the same timing as t1 when the opening / closing member 168 is displaced to the open state. Displace. Then, at the timing t2 thereafter (after 0.1 sec), the state is shifted from the distributed state to the non-distributed state. In this situation (RC2 = 1 to 10), since the second distribution member 310 is not displaced, the distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 does not occur.

  In the situation of this operation pattern VA1, when the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is A1, the opening state is displaced at the timing t1, and the opening state is maintained until the timing t6 (after 1.8 sec). . In this case, the ratio of the period (0.1 sec) in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state to the period (1.8 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is very small. In the pattern, it is unlikely that the first sorting member 300 will be assigned to the detachment side.

  On the other hand, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is B1 (C1) in the situation of the operation pattern VA1, the opening state is displaced to the opening state at the timing of t1, and the opening state is at t3 earlier than the timing of the above t6. It is maintained until the timing (after 0.2 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (0.1 sec) in which the first sorting member 300 is in the sorting state to the period (0.2 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is the ratio of the opening / closing pattern A1. Compared with the opening / closing pattern A1, the possibility that the first sorting member 300 is assigned to the disengagement side becomes larger. However, since the period during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is short, the winning probability for the accessory device 150 is lower than the opening / closing pattern A1. Considering the winning probability to the accessory device 150 and the distribution rate by the first distribution member 300 when winning, in the situation of the operation pattern VA1, the opening / closing pattern A1 is more open / closed pattern B1 (C1). ) Is higher than V.

  When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA2 (RC2 = 11 to 16), the non-distributed state is changed to the distributed state at the same timing as t1 when the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state. Displace. Then, at a timing t4 thereafter (after 1.0 sec), the state is shifted from the distributed state to the non-distributed state. In this situation (RC2 = 11-16), since the second distribution member 310 is not displaced, the distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 does not occur.

  In the situation of this operation pattern VA2, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing combination 168 is A1, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state for the period (1.8 sec) when the opening / closing combination 168 is in the open state. The ratio of the period (1.0 sec) is larger than that in the situation of the operation pattern VA1, and the possibility that the first sorting member 300 will be assigned to the detachment side is higher than that in the operation pattern VA1. .

  On the other hand, in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is B2 (RC2 = 11-13), the opening state is displaced at the timing of t1, and the opening state is from the timing of t3. It is maintained until the timing of t4 (after 1.0 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (1.0 sec) in which the first sorting member 300 is in the sorting state to the period (1.0 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is the ratio of the opening / closing pattern B1. Compared with the opening / closing pattern B1, the possibility that the first sorting member 300 will be assigned to the disengagement side becomes larger. However, since the period during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is longer than the opening / closing pattern B1, the winning probability for the accessory device 150 is higher than that of the opening / closing pattern B1. Considering the winning probability for the accessory device 150 and the distribution rate by the first distribution member 300 when winning, in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, the opening / closing pattern B2 is more open / closed pattern B1 (C1 ) Is higher than V.

  In the situation where the operation pattern is VA2, when the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is B1 (C1) (RC2 = 14 to 16), the opening state is displaced at the timing of t1, and the opening state is the above-described t3. Until the timing of (after 0.2 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (1.0 sec) in which the first sorting member 300 is in the sorting state to the period (0.2 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is the opening / closing pattern B1, Compared with the case of B2, it becomes larger and the possibility that the first distribution member 300 will be assigned to the disengagement side becomes higher than the open / close patterns B1 and B2 in the operation pattern VA1. In addition, since the period during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is shorter than the opening / closing pattern B2, the winning probability for the accessory device 150 is lower than that of the opening / closing pattern B2. Furthermore, in the case of this operation pattern VA2, the opening / closing timing and the opening / closing state of the opening / closing member 168 are the same as in the case of VA1, but in the case of VA2, the opening / closing member 168 is moved from the open state. Since there is a period during which the first sorting member 300 is in the sorted state even after switching to the closed state, for example, a game ball that has won the bonus device 150 immediately before the opening / closing feature 168 is in the closed state. Even if there is, there is a possibility that the first sorting member 300 may later sort the detachment side. Therefore, in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, the V winning probability is lower in B1 than in the opening / closing pattern B2, and the V winning probability is lower in VA2 than in VA1 even in the same opening / closing pattern B1.

  When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA3 (RC2 = 17 to 19), the first distribution member 300 does not operate, so there is no possibility that the first distribution member 300 is distributed to the detachment side. . On the other hand, during this period, the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is switched from VB1 to VB2, and the second distribution member 310 may be distributed to the V winning side. Specifically, in the operation pattern VB2, the second distribution member 310 is moved from the non-distributed state to the distributed state at a timing t4 that is 1.0 sec after the timing t1 when the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state. It is displaced to. Then, the distribution state is maintained for 0.1 sec thereafter, and the state is shifted from the distribution state to the non-distribution state at the timing t5.

  If the opening / closing combination of the opening / closing combination 168 is A2 (C2) in the situation of the operation patterns VA3, VB2, the opening / closing combination 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the opening state is at the timing of t4. (After 1.0 sec). In this case, if it is a game ball that has won a prize device 150 immediately before the opening and closing accessory 168 is in a closed state, there is a possibility that it will be distributed to the V winning side by the second sorting member 310 thereafter.

  On the other hand, if the opening / closing combination of the opening / closing combination 168 is B3 in the situation of the operation patterns VA3, VB2, the opening / closing combination 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the opening state is the timing of t3 ( Until 0.2 sec). In this case, even when a game ball enters the accessory device 150, the interval between the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state Therefore, the possibility of being distributed to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 in this pattern is low.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the opening / closing accessory 168 provided in the accessory device 150 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, a game ball can be won in the accessory device 150, and a V prize sensor in the accessory device 150 is obtained. In the configuration in which the round of the opening / closing execution mode continues by being detected by 192, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is different in each round. Accordingly, the continuation rate (V winning rate) of each round is changed without changing the operation timing of each accessory (sorting member 300, 310, rotating body 201, etc.) provided in the accessory device 150. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest while ensuring the fairness of the game.

  In each round game in the open / close execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode, a round (open / close pattern B or C) having a lower V winning probability than the other rounds (open / close pattern A) was provided. Thereby, it can be made to pay attention especially whether it continues to the next round in this round, and an attention degree can be raised suitably.

  The next round of the opening / closing pattern round with the low V winning probability is the opening / closing pattern round with the higher V winning probability. As a result, if a round with a low V winning probability is passed, the next is easy to continue, and the degree of attention to the round with the low V winning probability can be further increased.

  In each round opening / closing pattern, the V winning probability is varied depending on the number of times the opening / closing role 168 is opened / closed. As a result, in one round game, it is possible to play a game such as how many times to open and close the V prize or whether it is easy to win the V prize, and it is possible to improve the interest.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in the normal gaming state is made different so that the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is made different. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the success / failure determination based on winning a prize in the first working port 38 and the success / failure determination based on winning a prize in the second working port 39 are different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, in the present embodiment, the result table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 has a result table for the first working port (FIG. 30A) and a second working port. A result table (FIG. 30B) is stored. Since the result table for the first working port is the same as the result table in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  In the result table for the second working port, a special release A result and a special release B result are set as game results, in addition to a disengagement result, a direct hit result, and a normal release result. In the special opening A result and the special opening B result, the number of times of opening is the same number as the normal opening result (two times), and the first opening timing is the same as the normal opening result (by the opening type counter CS). The length of the period for maintaining the first open state, the length of the period for maintaining the closed state, and the length of the period for maintaining the second open state are set to be different.

  Specifically, in the case of a normal opening result, the period in which the opening state is continued is uniformly 2.0 sec, and the waiting period in which the closing state between the first opening and the second opening is maintained. Is uniformly 1.0 sec. On the other hand, in the case of the special opening A result, the period in which the first open state is maintained is the period TC1 (0.1 sec), and the period in which the second open state is maintained is the period TC3 ( 0.7 sec), and the waiting period between the first and second open states is a period TC2 (1.2 sec). In the case of the special opening B result, the period in which the first open state is maintained is the period TD1 (0.1 sec), and the period in which the second open state is maintained is the period TD3 (0.3 sec). ), And the waiting period between the first and second open states is a period TD2 (1.5 sec).

  The period during which the first open state is maintained and the period during which the second open state is maintained are set in step S902 in the mid-control process (FIG. 20). Specifically, in step S902, the game result that is the current release opportunity is referred to, and based on the result, a process of inputting a numerical value corresponding to the current release period to the release period counter is executed. Further, the standby period between the first and second open states is set in step S909 in the process during control (FIG. 20). Specifically, in step S909, a process is performed in which a game result that is the current release opportunity is referred to, and a numerical value corresponding to the current standby period is input to the standby period counter based on the result.

  In the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in the normal gaming state and the operation timing of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 31 (a) shows the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the operation timing of each of the sorting members 300, 310 in the case of the normal opening result, and FIG. 31 (b) shows the result of the special opening A. The relationship between the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the operation timing of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 in the case of the special opening B result is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (a), when a winning to the operation ports 38, 39 occurs at the timing of t1, a period corresponding to the value of the opening type counter CS is passed (step S802), and the opening / closing accessory is reached at the timing of t2. 168 is displaced to the open state. And this open state is maintained over 2.0 sec, and it changes to a closed state at the timing of t9. If the winning that occurred at the timing of t1 is a winning at the second operating port 39 and the result of two normal opening, the opening and closing accessory 168 is at the timing of t10, which is 1.0 sec after the timing of t9. Displace to open state. And this open state is also maintained over 2.0 sec, and it changes to a closed state at the timing of t14.

  The operation of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 will be described. As described above, the setting of the operation timing and the drive control of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 are performed in the first sort setting in step S803 in the control start process (FIG. 19). Processing and the second distribution setting process in step S804, the first distribution control process in step S1002 in the distribution process (FIG. 21), and the second distribution control process in step S1004.

  The first distribution member 300 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state at the timing t2 when the opening / closing member 168 is in the open state (after the first period has elapsed since the open state is opened), for 1.5 sec. This distribution state is maintained over the (second period). And at the timing of t5, it shifts from a distributed state to a non-distributed state. If the current opening is a result of opening twice, the undistributed state is maintained for 1.0 sec (fifth period) from the timing of t5, and the opening timing of the opening / closing member 168 thereafter is t10. At the timing (after the first period has elapsed since the release state), the state is again shifted to the distribution state. This distribution state is also maintained for 1.5 seconds (second period), and is shifted to the non-distribution state at the timing t11.

  The second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state at the timing t7 after the elapse of 1.8 seconds (third period) from the timing t2 when the opening / closing member 168 is opened. . This distribution state is maintained for 0.1 sec (fourth period), and is shifted to the non-distribution state at timing t8. If the current opening is a result of opening twice, 0.6 sec (sixth period) from the timing of t8 to the timing of t10, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the opening state at the timing of t10. The unallocated state is maintained for 1.8 sec (third period). Then, the state is shifted from the non-distributed state to the distributed state at the timing t12, the state is maintained for 0.1 sec (fourth period), and is shifted to the non-distributed state at the timing t13.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the game result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the value of the opening type counter CS is obtained when a winning to the operation ports 38, 39 occurs at the timing of t1. After a period corresponding to (step S802), the opening / closing member 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing t2. This operation is the same as in the case of the normal release result.

  When the game result is a special opening A result, the open state is maintained for 0.1 sec (period TC1) from the timing of t2, and is shifted to the closed state at the timing of t3. Then, at the timing of t4, which is 1.2 seconds (period TC2) after the timing of t3, the closed state is displaced to the opened state. This open state is maintained for 0.7 sec (period TC3), and is displaced from the open state to the closed state at the timing t9, and the second opening is completed.

  When the game result is a special release B result, the open state is maintained for 0.1 sec (period TD1) from the timing of t2, and is shifted to the closed state at the timing of t3. Then, at the timing of t6 which is 1.5 seconds (period TD2) after the timing of t3, the closed state is displaced to the opened state. This open state is maintained for 0.3 sec (period TD3), and is displaced from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t8, and the second opening is completed.

  Here, even when the game result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the operation timing of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 is the same. Therefore, the ratio of the period in which each of the sorting members 300 and 310 is in the sorted / unsorted state with respect to one opening period in the opening / closing member 168 is the normal opening result, the special opening A result, and the special opening B result. Is different.

  Specifically, in the normal release result, in one open state (for example, t2 to t9, t10 to t14), the ratio of the first distribution member 300 in the distribution state is 15/20, and the second vibration The ratio that the distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is 1/20.

  On the other hand, in the case of the special opening A result, in the second opening state (from t4 to t9), the ratio of the first distributing member 300 in the distributing state is 2/7, and the normal opening result is Lower than the case. Moreover, the ratio that the 2nd distribution member 310 is a distribution state is 1/7, and is higher than the case of the said normal open | release result.

  In the case of the special opening B result, in the second opening state (from t6 to t8), the ratio of the first sorting member 300 in the sorting state is 0/3, which is lower than in the case of the normal opening result. Moreover, the ratio that the 2nd distribution member 310 is a distribution state is 1/3, and is higher than the case of the said normal open | release result.

  As described above, when the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, distribution to the off side can occur, and when the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, distribution to the V winning side is performed. Can occur. Therefore, as described above, if the probability of distribution by the first distribution member 300 is lower than the normal release result as in the special release A result and the special release B result, the probability of occurrence of the V prize increases. In addition, if the probability of being sorted by the second sorting member 310 is higher than the normal release result, the probability of occurrence of a V prize is increased.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the operation pattern of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 is changed by changing the opening and closing mode of the opening and closing accessory 168 in the normal gaming state. Without winning, it is possible to change the probability of V winning when the winning device 150 is won.

  In addition, the number of times of opening of the normal opening result based on winning to the second working port 39 (2 times) and the number of opening times of the special opening A result and the special opening B result (2 times) are set to the same number of times. Since there is no need to increase the number of times of opening and closing, the storage capacity can be reduced.

  The timing at which the opening / closing accessory 168 starts to open based on the winning at the second operating port 39 is the same timing as the other normal opening results (opening type counter) even if the result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result. CS timing). As a result, it is possible to suppress the so-called stopping action of firing the game ball in accordance with the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports that it is a special opening A result and a special opening B result with the timing before the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 by the symbol display apparatus 51 grade | etc.,. In this way, for example, it is easy to make a V prize according to the relationship between the rotational position of the rotating body 201 and the period required to reach the derivation unit 186 and the operation timing of the distribution members 300 and 310. Compared to the configuration in which the difficulty in whispering is notified after the winning of the accessory device 150 occurs, the ease of making the V winning is the timing before the winning of the accessory device 150. Can be performed. By doing in this way, interest to the operation | movement (flowing aspect) of a game ball can be brought further.

  In the present embodiment, the level of the V winning rate has been described based on the relationship between the normal opening result and each special opening result, but the concept of the present invention can be applied even if the following changes are made. Therefore, in the modification shown in FIG. 32, the level of the V winning rate will be described in relation to each special release result and the distribution members 300 and 310 (particularly the second distribution member 310).

  In this modification, a special opening A result, a special opening B result, and a special opening C result are set as the special opening results. Each of the special opening A to C results is a result of performing the opening operation twice, similarly to the special opening A result and the special opening B result in the above embodiment. Each special opening A to C result may be distributed with a predetermined probability based on the winning to the first working port 38, or with a predetermined probability based on the winning to the second working port 39 It may be distributed.

  In the special opening A result in the modification shown in FIG. 32 (a), the value of the opening type counter CS is based on the winning (that has been distributed) to any one of the operating ports 38, 39 generated at the timing of ta1. After a period of time, the first opening operation is performed at the timing ta2 (the opening / closing member 168 is displaced to the opened state).

  In this modification, the second distribution member 310 as the distribution member that changes the V winning percentage is distributed after 1.4 seconds (timing ta7), which is a predetermined period from the timing t2. It is assumed that the state is displaced and maintained for 0.4 sec (displaced to a non-distributed state at the timing ta9).

  In the first opening operation of the result of the special opening A, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TE1) from the timing of ta2, and the first opening operation ends at the timing of ta3 (opening / closing member 168 Is displaced to the closed state). Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing ta7 that is 1.2 seconds (period TE2) after the timing ta3 (the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the opening state). Thereafter, the second opening operation ends at the timing of ta9, which is 0.4 sec (period TE3) after the timing of ta7 (the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state).

  As in the special opening A result, the first opening operation of the special opening B result in this modification is maintained in the opening state for 0.2 sec (period TF1) from the timing of ta2, and the 1st opening operation is performed at the timing of ta3. The second opening operation is completed. Then, the second release operation is started at the timing of ta6 that is 0.8 seconds (period TF2) after (short) 0.8 seconds (period TF2) from the timing of ta3. Thereafter, the second release operation is completed at the timing of ta8, which is 0.5 sec (period TF3) after the timing of ta6.

  In the first opening operation of the special opening C result in this modification, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TG1) from the timing of ta2, similarly to the special opening A result and the special opening B result, and ta3 The first opening operation ends at the timing. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of ta4, which is 0.5 seconds (period TG2) after (short) 0.5 seconds (period TG2) from the timing of ta3. Thereafter, the second release operation ends at the timing ta5 0.2 sec (period TG3) after the timing ta4.

  In these cases, the special opening A result overlaps with the situation where the second sorting member 310 is in the sorting state from the timing ta7 to the timing ta9 in which the opening state is maintained in the second opening operation. In this situation, if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150, the prize is almost distributed to the V winning side by the second sorting member 310.

  In the special opening B result, in the second opening operation, the period during which the open state is maintained is longer than the special opening A result (period TE3 <period TF3), while the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state. And the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is a period from the timing of ta7 to the timing of ta8, and the situation where the overlap occurs is more than in the case of the special opening A result. Shorter. As a result, even if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150, it is not distributed to the V winning side as in the special opening A result, but is distributed to the V winning side by the second distributing member 310 according to the winning timing. Whether or not it will be different. More specifically, if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150 during the final stage of the second opening operation, the prize is distributed to the V prize side, and otherwise, the prize is not distributed to the V prize side.

  As a result of the special opening C, in the second opening operation, there is no overlap between the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the opened state and the period in which the second sorting member 310 is in the sorted state. As a result, even when a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150 in the second opening operation, the distribution to the V prize side by the second sorting member 310 does not occur.

  As described above, by setting the opening operation timing of each special opening A to C result, it is possible to vary the probability of V winning.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 32 (b), the second distribution member 310 is made while maintaining the same total period in which the open state of each special opening A to C results is maintained in the modification shown in FIG. 32 (a). The opening / closing timing is set so that the probability of distribution to the V winning side is different.

  That is, as in the case of FIG. 32 (a), the second sorting member 310 is at a timing tb8 which is a predetermined timing after 1.4 seconds from the timing tb2 which is the first opening timing. Displacement to the distributed state. And at the timing of tb10 which is 0.4 sec later, it is displaced to the undistributed state.

  In the first opening operation as a result of the special opening A in this modification, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TH1) from the timing of tb2, and the first opening operation ends at the timing of tb3. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing tb8 after 1.2 sec (period TH2) from the timing tb3. Thereafter, the second opening operation is completed at the timing of ta9 after 0.4 sec (period TH3) from the timing of tb8.

  Similarly to the special opening A result, the first opening operation of the special opening B result in the present modified example maintains the open state for 0.2 sec (period TI1) from the timing of tb2, and the 1st opening operation is performed at the timing of tb3. The second opening operation is completed. Then, the second release operation is started at the timing of tb7 which is 0.9 sec (period TI2) after (short) 0.9 sec (period TI2) from the timing of tb3. After that, the second release operation ends at the timing of tb9 which is 0.4 sec (period TI3) after the timing of tb7.

  The first opening operation of the special opening C result in this modification differs from the special opening A result and the special opening B result, and differs from the period TH1 and the period TI1 from the timing of tb2 (long) 0.4 sec (period TJ1 ) And the open state is maintained, and the first opening operation ends at the timing of tb4. Then, the second release operation is started at the timing of tb5 which is 0.3 seconds (period TJ2) after (short) 0.3 sec (period TJ2) from the timing TH2 and the period TI2. Thereafter, the second opening operation ends at the timing tb6, which is 0.2 sec (period TJ3) after the timing tb5.

  In these cases, the total period during which the opening / closing member 168 is open in the special opening A result is TH1 + TH3 (0.6 sec), and in the case of the special opening B result, TI1 + TI3 (0.6 sec). In the case of the open C result, it is TJ1 + TJ3 (0.6 sec), and the total period in the open state is the same for any special open AC result.

  As described above, even when the opening / closing timing of each special opening AC result is set so that the total period of the opening state is the same, the opening / closing member 168 is in the opening state. The overlap between the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is in the order of special opening A result> special opening B result> special opening C result. Thereby, in each release result, it becomes possible to vary the V winning rate in relation to the operation timing of the second sorting member 310 without varying the winning rate to the accessory device 150 itself.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the setting method of the open / close pattern for each round in the open / close execution mode is different from the first and second embodiments. Thus, the setting process for each round in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the setting process for each round is a process executed in step S1304 of the opening / closing process (FIG. 24) in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 23), and is activated when the opening / closing accessory 168 is released. Process.

  In the setting process for each round in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, the process described in the first embodiment is almost the same as the process described in FIG. The difference is that when it is determined in step S1402 that the continuation flag is not stored, in each of the above embodiments, processing for setting a predetermined round pattern is executed in steps S1403 and S1404. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a negative determination is made in step S1402, a lottery process for determining a round pattern by lottery is executed in step S1408. In this lottery process, a lottery counter for round patterns is acquired from the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and a lottery table for round patterns is acquired from the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113. The round pattern lottery counter is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is updated at a predetermined cycle, and can acquire random numerical information.

  The round pattern lottery table can determine the current round pattern in accordance with the value of the round pattern lottery counter. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33B, for example, the lottery table is set so that the current round pattern differs depending on the previous round pattern. That is, according to the previous round pattern, the selection rate of the pattern A that is most likely to continue the round as the current round pattern is different. If the previous round pattern is the pattern A, the pattern A is selected at 50%, In other cases, pattern B or pattern C that is difficult to continue the round is selected, whereas pattern A is selected if the previous round pattern is pattern B or pattern C that is difficult to continue the round (in pattern B, pattern B is selected). 80%, 90% for pattern C). In the first round of the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined pattern may be set, or a random setting may be made by lottery or the like.

  Then, after performing the process of step S1408, after performing the corresponding round pattern setting process in step S1405, the processes in and after step S1406 are executed.

  By adopting a configuration in which the round pattern is determined by lottery or the like as described above, the opening pattern of each round becomes more diverse in the opening / closing execution mode, and the game can be diversified. In the above embodiment, the round of the pattern (pattern A) that is easy to continue is set in the round following the round of the pattern (pattern B, C) that is difficult to continue round. Even if the round is unfavorable to the player, if it is overcome, the next round will be advantageous to the player, so that even the unfavorable round can be immersed in the game. On the other hand, the next round of the pattern that is easy to continue rounding is set so that it is easy to select a round that is difficult to continue rounding, and it is possible to achieve fairness of the game without significantly increasing the starting rate Become.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a round pattern for the next and subsequent rounds is set according to the timing at which a V prize is generated as the condition for continuing the round.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing process in the present embodiment, which is basically the same as the opening / closing process (FIG. 24) in each of the above embodiments. The difference is that when a V prize is generated in step S1311 and it is determined that the continuous variation mode is set in step S1312, the process proceeds to step S1318 in each of the above embodiments, whereas in the present embodiment, a step is performed. In S1329, a process of grasping the timing at which the V winning is generated, that is, the number of times of opening during the round is executed. More specifically, a process of storing the value of the second round counter RC2 in the second round counter RC2 storage area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The second round counter RC2 storage area can store the value of the second round counter RC2 independently of the update even if the second round counter RC2 is updated at each opening and closing of the round. It is configured.

  After the value of the second round counter RC2 is stored in step S1329, the second round counter RC2 is cleared to “0” in step S1318, and the processes after step S1319 are executed.

  The setting process for each round in the present embodiment is configured to execute a round pattern lottery process for each round shown in FIG. 33A in the third embodiment. And as a lottery table (distribution table) of the round pattern in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c), the previous round pattern, the second round counter RC2 described above, The next round pattern is set to be different depending on the value of. More specifically, when the previous round is a pattern A round that is easy to continue, as shown in FIG. 35A, in the next round, the second round counter RC2 is less than 1-16. In the case of 17 to 19, the pattern A that is easy to continue the round is easily selected.

  That is, in the previous round, when the round continuation condition is satisfied by the number of times of opening / closing in the final stage (RC2 = 17-19), the opening / closing of the first half (RC2 = 1-10) and the second half (RC2 = 11-16) This is a configuration that is more advantageous to the player in the next round than in the case where the condition for continuing the round is satisfied by the number of times.

  By doing this, even if it is a scene that can be anxious as a player because the conditions for continuing the round are not satisfied, it will be advantageous if the round continues at the end of the game, The game can be balanced with the advantage of the round.

  In particular, in the final stage of pattern A (RC2 = 17 to 19), since the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is likely to occur, the condition for continuing the round to the final stage in pattern A is not satisfied. However, in the final stage, the condition for the continuation of the round is easily satisfied, and the occurrence of the event that the opening / closing execution mode ends without the condition for the continuation of the round being suppressed is suppressed. Therefore, as described above, it is considered that the player is highly interested in the timing of the V winning so that the V winning is generated at the end of the round as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 35A, when comparing the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (11 to 16) at the time of pattern A, the first half continues the round in the next round than the second half. The easy pattern A is set to be easily selected, and the first half is set to be more advantageous than the second half.

  In each of the embodiments including the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode of the continuous variation mode, if the condition for continuing the round is satisfied, the next winning number (9) is not reached even if the maximum number of winnings per round is not reached (9). Since it is configured to shift to a round, it is considered that the player will be interested in winning V in the number of winnings that is as close to the upper limit as possible. In this case, for example, if a V is won at a stage where the number of winnings is small, there is a possibility that the player may feel that he has lost in the round due to the maximum number of winnings. Therefore, as described above, the V win in the first half of the round, which is the stage where the number of wins is relatively small, is the next time than the V win in the second half of the round, which is the stage where the number of wins is higher. If the round is to be advantageous to the player, even if it is a round that the player feels lost as described above, it will be configured to guarantee that, and the player will be dissatisfied. It can be solved.

  In the lottery (distribution) table at the time of pattern B shown in FIG. 35B and the lottery (distribution) table at the time of pattern C shown in FIG. When a V prize is generated, it is easy to select a pattern A that is easy to continue the round in the next round. More specifically, as already described, in pattern B, an open / close pattern is set so that V winning can occur in the second half of the round (RC2 = 11-16), and if V winning occurs at that timing The next time, the round of the pattern A which is advantageous for the player is likely to be made. In pattern C, an open / close pattern is set so that a V prize can be generated at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19). If a V prize occurs at that timing, the pattern is advantageous to the player next time. It is easy to make a round of A. On the other hand, in the pattern B, in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the final stage (RC2 = 17 to 19), it is difficult for the winning device 150 to win in the first place. Similarly, in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) in the pattern C, it is difficult to win the prize device 150 in the first place. Therefore, by adopting the configuration as described above, it is possible to collect points that the player pays attention to, and to inflate the game.

  Note that the lottery table for each pattern is only an example, and other configurations may be used. For example, if a V prize is generated at a timing at which it is difficult for a prize to occur in the pattern B or the pattern C, if the player is set to be advantageous (so that the pattern A is easily selected), the prize is given to the accessory device 150. Even in a situation where it is difficult to generate a game, it is possible to generate a meaning of generating a prize for the accessory device 150, and it is possible to suppress a so-called stopping action that stops the launch of the game ball. .

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the variation of the open pattern is different from that in the fourth embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 36, as an open pattern in the present embodiment, a pattern D or a pattern E is set in addition to or instead of the patterns A to C.

  In the pattern D, in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16), a winning for the accessory device 150 can occur, and there is a possibility of a V winning. However, compared with the pattern A, the winning rate and the V winning rate for the accessory device 150 are set lower.

  And in the last stage of the round in pattern D (RC2 = 17-19), the maintenance period of an open state is set longer than pattern A, and the winning rate and V winning rate to the accessory device 150 are the pattern A The pattern D is set higher than the pattern D. Therefore, at the end of the round, the condition for continuation of the round is easier to establish the pattern D than the pattern A. As mentioned above, the condition of the continuation of the condition is suppressed in the first half and the second half of the round. It can be assumed that the following condition can be satisfied. Therefore, in the pattern D, the condition for continuation of the round is easily established near the upper limit of the number of winnings, and in the opening / closing execution mode of the continuous variation mode, the pattern is more advantageous for the player than the pattern A.

  In the pattern E, in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10), the period during which the open state is maintained is set longer than that in the pattern A. For this reason, the winning rate and the V winning rate for the accessory device 150 are higher than those of the pattern A, and the condition for continuing the round is easily established during this period. On the other hand, in the second half of the round (RC2 = 10 to 16), the winning device 150 is set so as not to easily win, and the same opening / closing timing as the pattern B1 in the pattern B and the pattern C1 in the pattern C is set. It has become.

  And in the last stage of the round in pattern E (RC2 = 17-19), the maintenance period of an open state is set longer than the launch cycle of a game ball, and there is a sufficient possibility of winning a prize device 150 In addition, when the game ball wins the accessory device 150 in the maintenance period of the open state, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is an opening / closing timing that can be generated.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (e), the lottery table (distribution table) of the round pattern in the present embodiment depends on the values of the previous round pattern and the second round counter RC2. The next round pattern is set differently.

  The difference from the fourth embodiment is that, in the lottery (distribution) table for each of the patterns A to C, an example of distribution to the pattern D and the pattern E is added, and the pattern D and the pattern E A lottery (distribution) table is set. Here, the characteristics of the lottery table of the pattern D and the pattern E will be described in detail.

  In the lottery table for pattern D, if the continuation conditions for the round are satisfied in the first half and the second half (RC = 1 to 16) of the round, patterns A, D, and E that are likely to continue the round are difficult to select and B and C are easily selected. On the other hand, when the continuation condition for the round is satisfied at the end of the round (RC = 17 to 19), the pattern A that facilitates the continuation of the round is easily selected. As described above, in the first half and the second half of the round, although the prize for the accessory device 150 may occur, the continuation condition is set to be less established than in the pattern A. However, it is possible to entertain a situation where the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied (V winning is difficult to occur). Then, at the end of the round in the pattern D, the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are increased, so that the continuation condition is easily established. Therefore, in pattern D, the first half and the second half of the round are awarded to the limit of the maximum number of winnings in the round, and the final condition is met when the winning condition is reached so that the upper limit number of winnings is reached or V is awarded at the end. The person can control to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to actively participate in the game.

  In the lottery table for pattern E, when a V winning occurs in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10) where winning for the accessory device 150 is likely to occur, patterns B and C that are difficult to continue the round are easily selected, and the round continues The patterns A, D, and E that are likely to be damaged are difficult to select. On the other hand, when a V winning is generated at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19) in which winning for the similar accessory device 150 is likely to occur, the pattern A that is likely to continue the round is easily selected. Therefore, even if the number of times of opening and closing that is likely to cause winnings to the accessory device 150 is selected, whether to win in the first half or win in the final stage in relation to the continuation rate of the next round Can be expected to participate in the game.

  Further, in the pattern E lottery table, when a V prize is generated in the latter half of the round (RC2 = 11 to 16) in which winning to the accessory device 150 is difficult to occur, the pattern A and the pattern E that are likely to continue the round are easily selected. ing. In relation to this point and the selection rate when the V winning is generated in the final stage, depending on the number of rounds, there may be a situation in which it is advantageous for the player to aim for the winning device 150 from the second half. For this reason, even in a situation where it is difficult for a prize to be awarded to the accessory device 150, it is possible to cause the significance of launching the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the so-called stopping action.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the special notification is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at a predetermined timing in the opening / closing execution mode. First, an effect process executed by the MPU 142 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect process is a process activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

  In the effect processing, processing for executing various effects is performed based on a command from the main control device 81. Incidentally, the RAM 144 of the effect control device 82 is provided with a received command storage area in which commands received from the main control device 81 can be stored. The area is configured as a ring buffer capable of storing a plurality of commands individually and reading from the previously stored commands.

  In the production process, first, in step SB101, it is determined whether an open command has been received. As already described, the opening command is a command output from the main control device 81 at the time of opening in each round in the opening / closing process in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is determined in step SB101 that an opening command has been received, an opening handling process is executed in step SB102. Although this process will be described in detail later, it is a process for executing a special notification at a predetermined timing in the opening / closing execution mode.

  When a negative determination is made in step SB101, or after the processing of step SB102 is executed, the process proceeds to step SB103. In step SB103, it is determined whether a normal release command has been received. As described above, the normal opening command causes a winning to the operating ports 38 and 39 in the normal gaming state, and the opening / closing role 168 is opened like the winning result or the winning result based on the winning result. This command is output from the main control device 81 except when it is not (when it is a normal release result or a special release result). If it is determined in step SB103 that a normal release command has been received, normal release handling processing is executed in step SB104. Incidentally, the normal opening command includes information such as the contents of the lottery result set by the main controller 81, the number of times of opening, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, and the like. In this normal opening handling process, based on the received command information, the opening number notification for notifying the number of opening at the time of winning the operating ports 38, 39, the opening notification as an effect at the time of opening the opening / closing accessory 168, etc. A process for performing an effect is executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step SB103, or after the processing of step SB104 is executed, the process proceeds to step SB105. In step SB105, as other processing, other commands received from the main control device 81 (a command at the time of shift including winning information in the normal gaming state and a shift of the hold information, an out-of-game command indicating the game result, and a direct hit command In addition, the content of the command based on the control end command, the prize winning command in the accessory, and the opening command, the closing command, the ending command, etc. related to the control of the opening / closing execution mode) output when controlling the accessory device 150 A display content command is output to the display control device 100 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the display, and processing for display control of the symbol display device 51 is executed. Also, in step SB105, for example, if an operation means (production button or the like) for production is connected to the production control device 82, production for producing the response (production for the operation of the production button) is executed. . In step SB105, control for performing demonstration screen effects is performed, and various other effects are performed. And after performing the process of step SB105, the process for this effect is complete | finished.

  Next, the contents of the special notification during the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern in the opening / closing execution mode that is added or changed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing an opening handling process. (C) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of various special effects performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as a special notification.

  First, as shown in FIG. 39A, in the present embodiment, patterns C and F having different opening / closing timings according to the number of times of opening (RC2) are set as opening patterns in the opening / closing execution mode. . As already described, in the pattern C, the opening / closing accessory 168 has an opening / closing timing that makes it difficult to win the accessory device 150 in both the first half (RC2 = 1-10) and the second half (RC2 = 11-16) of the round. Works. Then, in the final stage of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19), the opening / closing accessory 168 operates at such a timing that the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can occur.

  In the pattern F, in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10), the opening / closing accessory 168 operates at an opening / closing timing at which it is difficult to win the accessory device 150 as in the case of the pattern C. The operation timing is the same as that of the pattern C. Therefore, in the first half of the round, whether the round pattern of pattern C or the round pattern of pattern F is selected is difficult or impossible for the player to identify.

  In the pattern F, in the second half of the round (RC2 = 11-16), unlike the pattern C, the opening / closing accessory 168 operates at an opening / closing timing at which winning for the accessory device 150 is likely to occur. That is, in the second half of the round, unlike the pattern C, a prize for the accessory device 150 occurs, and a V prize can also occur as a condition for continuing the round.

  In the pattern F, when the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19) is reached, the V distribution can be generated as in the case of the pattern C. However, the period during which the open / closed accessory 168 is kept open is the above pattern. It becomes longer than the case of C, and the winning rate and V winning rate to the accessory device 150 are also higher than those of the pattern C.

  As described above, when the pattern C and the pattern F are compared, in the first half of the round, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is the same opening / closing pattern. Is difficult to identify which pattern C or F is a round. On the other hand, the pattern F is overwhelmingly more advantageous to the player than the pattern C for the latter half and the final part of the round.

  Therefore, such a change in the situation is notified on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. As a process for this, an opening handling process corresponding to the opening command output from the main controller 81 during the opening / closing execution mode is executed as shown in FIG. Incidentally, the opening command output from the main control device 81 includes information on the type of opening / closing execution mode (16R continuous mode or continuous variation mode), and the opening command output at each opening includes Information on whether the release is a release command at the start of a round or an open command corresponding to the number of releases during the round, numerical information of the first round counter RC1, numerical information of the second round counter RC2, and the like are included. These pieces of information can be grasped also on the production control device 82 side.

  In the opening handling process, first, in step SB201, a process of determining whether or not the current opening pattern is the pattern C or the pattern F is executed. If it is not the pattern C or the pattern F, the corresponding process is terminated as it is. If it is the pattern C or the pattern F, it is determined in step SB202 whether or not the second round counter RC2 is “11”. As already described, when the second round counter RC2 is 1 to 10, the opening and closing member operates in the same opening and closing pattern as the patterns C and F, and the second round counter RC2 becomes “11”. A difference in opening / closing pattern between C and pattern F occurs. Therefore, if the second round counter RC2 is not “11” in step SB202, the present handling process is terminated as it is, and if it is “11”, the process proceeds to step SB203.

  In step SB203, it is determined whether or not the pattern is C. If it is not the pattern C but the pattern F, the process proceeds to step SB204, and the display control apparatus 100 is controlled to execute the special effect A by the symbol display apparatus 51, and then the corresponding process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pattern C is determined in step SB203, the process proceeds to step SB205, and the display control apparatus 100 is controlled to execute the special effect B by the symbol display apparatus 51, and then the corresponding process is performed. finish.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (c), in the special effect A, for example, “Lucky !!!!” is displayed on the display screen G so as to notify the player that it is advantageous for the player after the timing (after the second half of the round). “Continuation chance!” Is displayed. In the special effect B, for example, “...” is displayed on the display screen G so as to notify the player that the special effect A is disadvantageous compared to the case where the special effect A is performed after the timing (after the second half of the round). ... (Sorry) "is displayed. In the case of this embodiment, even in the case of pattern C, there is a possibility that the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 may be performed at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19). In the special effect B, “... do not give up until the end!” Is displayed so as to notify that an advantageous situation exists.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is the same until the middle of the round, and the opening / closing pattern (pattern F) that is advantageous to the player from a predetermined timing is disadvantageous. An opening / closing pattern (pattern C) is provided, and at the predetermined timing, the symbol display device 51 notifies which pattern it is. By doing so, it is difficult to identify which pattern is round until the predetermined timing, and it is possible to raise interest in the special notification at the predetermined timing.

  In particular, until the predetermined timing, the situation is unfavorable for the player (the situation where it is difficult for the player to win the bonus item device 150). It is thought that the player's high interest will be given to the point of whether or not it will change.

  In the above embodiment, if the selection rate of the pattern C and the pattern F is easier to be selected than the pattern C in the open / close execution mode of the continuous variation mode, it is normally assumed that the disadvantageous situation for the player continues. When the special notification A is performed (when the pattern F is selected), the unexpected feeling can be enhanced. Thereby, it can be made easy to make a player feel the benefit by having performed special alerting | reporting A.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the sixth embodiment, the special notification is executed at a predetermined timing during the normal gaming state. As the special notification during the normal gaming state, a first special notification and a second special notification that suggest to adjust the launch timing of the game ball are set. The details of each of these special notifications will be described in detail later. By performing each special notification, the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the rate at which the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. And is set to increase.

  As a condition for executing these special notifications, in the present embodiment, for example, according to the round continuation timing in the opening / closing execution mode, a configuration for shifting to a mode in which special notifications advantageous to the player are easily performed and a mode in which it is not so is performed. And These modes will be described in detail later. First, processing related to grasping the round continuation timing related to the mode transition will be described.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing process in the present embodiment.

  The opening / closing process in the present embodiment is basically the same as the opening / closing process (FIG. 24) in each of the above embodiments. The difference is that when a V prize is generated in step S1311 and it is determined that the continuous variation mode is set in step S1312, the process proceeds to step S1318 in each of the above embodiments, whereas in the present embodiment, a step is performed. In S1329, a process of grasping the timing at which the V winning is generated, that is, the number of times of opening during the round is executed. More specifically, a process of storing the value of the second round counter RC2 in the second round counter RC2 storage area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The second round counter RC2 storage area can store the value of the second round counter RC2 independently of the update even if the second round counter RC2 is updated at each opening and closing of the round. It is configured. This is as described in the fourth embodiment.

  After executing the process of step S1329, the process of adding the value of the second round counter RC2 grasped in step S1329 in step S1330 to the value of the total round counter TRC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 Execute. The total round counter TRC is a counter for storing an integrated value at a timing (RC2 value) at which a round continuation condition is established by V winning in the open / close execution mode of the continuous variation mode.

  Then, after executing the process of step S1330, the second round counter RC2 is cleared to “0” in step S1318, and the processes after step S1319 are executed.

  In the opening / closing process in the present embodiment, the value of the total round counter TRC in the current opening / closing execution mode is output to the effect control device 82 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, that is, at the ending. That is, after the ending start process is executed in step S1327, the process of reading the value of the total round counter TRC from the various counter areas 114d is executed in step S1331, and in step S1328, the total ending command is received. Set the value of the round counter TRC.

  As already described, the ending command is output from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed in other processing (step SB105) of the effect processing (FIG. 38). Although the detailed description with the figure is omitted, in the other processes, based on the reception of the ending command, the special notification of the symbol display device 51 is executed according to the value of the total round counter TRC included in the ending command. Processing to switch display modes with different rates is performed.

  As the display mode, a normal mode, a relief mode, and a special mode are set. As shown in FIG. 41 (b), in the normal gaming state, for example, as a special notification execution rate when a special release result is obtained based on a winning to the second operating port 39, the relief mode has the highest execution rate. The revocation mode, the special mode, and the normal mode are set so that the execution rate of the special notification increases. In this case, the effect control device 82 that has received the ending command sets the relief mode if the value of the total round counter TRC included in the ending command is 1 to 50, and sets the normal mode if the value is 51 to 150. If it is 151 to 285, the special mode is set.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, if the condition for continuation of the round is met, the relief mode is easily set if the V winning generation timing is early, and the special mode is easily set if it is late. If the timing of the V winning is early, there is a high possibility that the maximum number of winnings has not been reached. Further, if the value of the total round counter TRC is small, there is a high possibility that the opening / closing execution mode is completed with a short number of rounds. Therefore, in such a case, the display mode is set to a relief mode in which special notification is more easily performed than usual. In this way, it is possible to rescue a player who has not obtained many benefits in the opening / closing execution mode.

  On the other hand, as described above, when a V winning is generated in the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) or the final stage (RC2 = 17 to 19) in each round and the round continuation condition is satisfied, it is treated favorably for the player (next) The player may try to perform a V winning as much as possible in the second half of the round or at the end of the round as much as possible. As a result, since the value of the total round counter TRC can also be increased, the display mode is set to a special mode in which special notification is more easily executed than usual, according to the player's hard work. By doing in this way, the player can expect more active participation in the game.

  Note that the special mode is only for the purpose of proactive participation of the player, so the execution rate of the special notification is lower in the special mode than in the relief mode. By doing in this way, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game without increasing the starting rate too much.

  The manner in which the special notification is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (c). Here, description will be made based on the result of the special opening A described in the modification of the second embodiment and the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (a), it is assumed that a winning is made to the operation ports 38 and 39 at the timing of t1 and the game result is a special opening A result. In this case, the first opening operation is started at the timing t2, and is ended at the timing t3. In addition, the second opening operation is started at the timing t5 and is ended at the timing t6.

  Here, the game ball is launched at a predetermined launch cycle (0.6 sec, Pa) from the game ball launch mechanism 53 by operating the launch handle 60. For example, as a situation where the operation of the firing handle 60 is continued, a game ball is launched at the timing of P1, the next game ball is launched at the timing of P2 after Pa, and P3 after that Pa. It is assumed that the game ball is fired at the timing of P4 and that the game ball is fired at the timing of P4 after that Pa.

  First, the case where the special notification is not performed will be described. In relation to the launch cycle Pa, for example, a game ball launched at the timing of P1 wins the bonus device 150 in the first release operation of the special release A result. Suppose (timing of t2). In this case, it is assumed that the game ball arrives at the second sorting member 310 at a timing t4 after a period required for the game ball winning in the accessory device 150 to reach the second sorting member 310. Then, at this timing, the second distribution member 310 is not in the distribution state, and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed.

  Further, for example, it is assumed that the game ball fired at the timing of P4 has reached the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening operation (timing of t6). In this case, although it reaches the 2nd distribution member 310 at the timing of t7, since it has already displaced from the distribution state to the non-distribution state, V distribution by the 2nd distribution member 310 is not performed.

  Next, a case where special notification is performed will be described. When a winning is made to the operation ports 38 and 39 at the timing of t8, for example, a display “For a moment!” is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as the first special notification. Based on this display, the player stops the launch of the game ball. When the game result based on the winning at the timing of t8 is a special opening A result, the first opening operation is started at the timing of t9 and is ended at the timing of t10. The second opening operation starts at the timing t12 and ends at the timing t14.

  In this case, when the game ball is fired at the timing P5 which is the timing before the start of the second opening operation, the game ball wins the accessory device 150 at the timing t12, and the game ball that has won the prize is The second distribution member 310 is reached at the timing of t13, and as a result, V distribution is performed and a V prize can be generated. In this case, as a second special notification at the timing t11 which is a timing (0.1 sec, period PC) slightly before the timing of P5, for example, “Now, hitting” on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Is displayed! Based on this display, the player starts a launch operation, and as a result, a game ball is launched at the timing of P5, and a V prize can be generated as described above. As a player, the game ball firing operation has been stopped over a period Pb longer than the firing cycle Pa.

  As described above, the V winning rate, that is, the rate of transition to the opening / closing execution mode can be changed by performing a special notification instructing a game ball launch operation in relation to the opening operation as a special notification. And without changing the basic configuration as a gaming machine by realizing it by the production side without changing the operation timing of the opening and closing member 168, the sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201, It is possible to easily adjust the starting pitch and change the specifications of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the period which stops discharge | release of a game ball may be lengthened by performing 1st special alerting | reporting as mentioned above. Therefore, for example, in the period from the first special notification to the second special notification, the launch of the game ball is not stopped, but is calculated backward from the timing at which the second special notification should be performed (the timing of P5). Even if the launching is stopped and then the game ball is continuously launched, the timing for performing the second special notification may be adjusted so that a V prize can be generated.

  Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, in a situation (TRC = 1 to 50) where the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 will be small (TRC = 1 to 50), it is configured to shift to a state advantageous to the player. It is possible to compensate for the fact that there are few benefits obtained by the person.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, even in a situation where the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 (TRC = 151 to 285) is likely to be increased, the configuration is shifted to an advantageous state for the player. In addition to the game of winning the game ball to the accessory device 150, the player can be interested in the winning timing (timing of occurrence of the V winning) and the like, and can further encourage the player to actively participate in the game. .

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the operation start timing of the sorting members 300 and 310 is changed as follows. That is, the operation start timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 is changed to a winning timing for the operation ports 38 and 39.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the sorting members 300 and 310 is started based on winning in the operation ports 38 and 39, and the operation pattern is uniformly set. Specifically, the first distribution member 300 distributes from the non-distributed state at the timing when the first period (1.5 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the timing when the winning to the first working port 38 occurs. When the second period (1.5 sec in the present embodiment) elapses from the timing, the distribution state returns to the non-distribution state. Further, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state at the timing when the third period (3.3 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the timing at which the winning to the first working port 38 is generated. When the fourth period (0.1 sec in this embodiment) elapses from that timing, the distribution state returns to the non-distribution state. In the case of the second operation port 39, the operation pattern at the time of winning to the first operation port 38 is the same operation pattern up to the middle, specifically, the first period and the second period (third period). The operation pattern until the elapse of the fourth period is the same, and thereafter (after the elapse of the second period or the fourth period), the operation again in the first period and the second period (the third period and the fourth period). The pattern is repeated. By doing in this way, compared with the structure which determines the operation pattern of the distribution member 300,310 after determining the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 like each said embodiment, simplification of control is achieved. .

  On the other hand, when the operation pattern of the allocating members 300 and 310 is set uniformly from the winning timing to the operation ports 38 and 39 as described above, for example, the second allocating member from the winning timing to the operating ports 38 and 39 is used. There is a concern that a so-called stop-attack action will be performed aiming at the distribution to the V winning side by 310. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the operation pattern of the sorting members 300 and 310 is uniformly set from the winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 as described above. By leaving a configuration in which the opening start timing of the accessory 168 is random, it is possible to suppress such a stopping action. Further, while randomizing the opening start timing in this way, it is possible to intentionally change the V winning rate on the gaming machine side by adjusting the opening start timing. Hereinafter, the configuration for that purpose will be described in detail.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing timing setting process in the present embodiment. As already described, the opening / closing timing setting process is a process executed in step S802 of the control start process (step S506, FIG. 17) in the game control process (FIG. 16) of the normal process. This is a process for setting the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 when a prize is won to 38, 39.

  In the present embodiment, first, in step S1601, a process of acquiring the release timing table from the release timing table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is executed. As the release timing table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, a first release timing table and a second release timing table are set.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the first release timing table is similar to the release timing table (FIG. 11 (c)) in each of the above embodiments, from the start timing of this processing until the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168. The opening standby time is set randomly (0.5 sec to 2.4 sec) according to the opening type counter CS. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the second opening timing table includes the first distribution member 300 (displacement distribution) and the second distribution member in a situation where the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state. The open standby time is set according to the relationship with the operation 310 (V distribution). The second opening timing table is more likely to generate a V prize than the first opening timing table. Although the second release timing table will be described in detail later, similarly to the first release timing table, the release waiting time is set to be different depending on the release type counter CS.

  Which release timing table is selected differs depending on, for example, the gaming state at the time of starting the present process (when a winning is made to the operation ports 38 and 39). Specifically, the second opening timing table is selected or selected until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the end of a predetermined opening / closing execution mode (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of the 16R continuous mode). After the end condition is satisfied, the first opening timing is selected or easily selected. As the end condition, for example, a configuration that is established when the winning number to the operating ports 38 and 39 and the number of opening / closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 (the number of operations) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), A configuration that can be realized by shifting to an open / close execution mode (for example, an open / close execution mode that is a continuous variation mode) is conceivable.

  After any opening timing table is selected in step S1601, the opening type counter CS is acquired in step S1602, and the corresponding opening timing (opening waiting time) is set in step S1603. After that, the opening / closing timing setting process is terminated.

  Details of each opening timing table selected in step S1601 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 44 in addition to FIG.

  First, the relationship between the operation pattern of the sorting members 300 and 310 and the waiting time for opening the opening / closing accessory 168 will be described with reference to FIG.

  For example, when a winning to the first operating port 38 occurs at the timing of t1, the first sorting member 300 is after the elapse of the first period (after 1.5 sec) from the timing of t1 when the winning is generated. It shifts from the non-distributed state to the distributed state at the timing t3, and then shifts from the distributed state to the non-distributed state at the timing t6 after the subsequent second period (after 1.5 sec). Further, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state at a timing t7 after the third period has elapsed (after 3.3 seconds) from the timing t1 when the winning occurs. At the timing t8, which is after the elapse of the fourth period (after 0.1 sec), the distribution state is shifted to the non-distribution state.

  The waiting time for opening is determined based on a winning to the first working port 38, for example, the waiting time for opening is shorter than the first period until the displacement timing of the first sorting member 300 (for example, 0. 0). 5 sec), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing t2 after the first waiting time has elapsed from the winning, and thereafter, a predetermined period (2.0 sec, step S902). The open state is maintained over a period of time (see FIG. 4), and the state is displaced to the closed state at the timing t5. In this case, in the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state, the period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state (displacement distribution period) overlaps, and the length of the period is 1.0 sec. It becomes. Further, there is no overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state (V distribution period).

  On the other hand, the opening waiting time determined based on the winning to the first working port 38 is a second waiting time (for example, 2.4 sec) longer than the first period until the displacement timing of the first sorting member 300. When set, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing t4 after the second waiting time has elapsed since winning a prize, and then opened for a predetermined period (2.0 sec). The state is maintained, and the state is displaced to the closed state at timing t10. In this case, in the period when the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state, the out-of-band distribution period with the first distribution member 300 overlaps, but becomes shorter than the case where the first standby time is set, and the period Is 0.6 sec. In addition, the V distribution period with the second distribution member 310 overlaps, and the length of the period is 0.1 sec.

  Since the operation pattern of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 when the winning to the second operating port 39 occurs is repeated when the winning to the first operating port 38 occurs, a detailed description will be given. Although omitted, the first distribution member 300 is displaced to the non-distributed state at the timing t6 and then to the distributed state at the timing t11 after the first period has elapsed. And it shifts to a non-distributed state again at the timing of t14 after the elapse of the second period from the timing of t11. The second sorting member 310 is displaced to the non-sorted state at the timing t8 and then to the sorted state at the timing t15 after the third period has elapsed. And it shifts to a non-distributed state at the timing of t16 after the lapse of the fourth period from the timing of t15.

  When the waiting time for opening is determined based on the winning to the second operating port 39, for example, when the waiting time for opening is the first waiting time, the off-assignment period or the V-assignment period for the first opening. This is the same as when winning a prize to the first working port 38. The waiting time between the first opening and the second opening is set at the timing of t5 when the first opening ends, and this time is a predetermined period (1.0 sec, see step S909). ing. Then, the second open state is reached at timing t9 when the standby time elapses, and the open state is maintained for a predetermined period (2.0 sec, see step S902). And it changes to a closed state at the timing of t13 when the period passes. Thus, when 0.5 sec is set as the first waiting time, the out-of-balance distribution period at the time of the second opening is 1.1 sec, which is longer than that at the first time. In addition, there is no overlap with the V distribution period even at the second opening.

  When the waiting time for opening determined based on the winning to the second operating port is the second waiting time, the first operation is performed for the off-assignment period and the V-assigning period for the first opening. This is the same as when winning a prize in the mouth 38. The waiting time between each opening is set at the timing of t10 when the first opening is finished (1.0 sec, refer to step S909), and the state is shifted to the opening state at the timing of t12 when the period elapses. And it shifts to a closed state at the timing of t17 when the period (refer to 2.0 sec step S902) for which this open state is maintained passes. As described above, when 2.4 sec is set as the second waiting time, the off-assignment period at the second release is 0.6 sec, which is the same length as the first. In addition, even when the second time is opened, an overlap with the V distribution period occurs, and the length of the period is 0.1 sec, which is the same as the first time.

  As described above, the lengths of the out-of-band distribution period and the V distribution period may differ depending on the set open standby time. In the present embodiment, the V winning rate is changed in the second release timing table by utilizing the overlapping relationship with the out-of-balance distribution period or the V distribution period.

  That is, when the opening standby time is set from 0.5 sec (first timing) to 1.0 sec (second timing), the period overlapping with the out-of-balance distribution period gradually increases (1.0 sec → 1.5 sec). ). For this reason, the probability that the game ball won in the accessory device 150 is distributed to the off-side becomes higher when the opening standby time is set to 1.0 sec than to be set to 0.5 sec. In other words, the V winning rate is lowered. Therefore, in the second release timing table, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the release type counter is set such that the probability that the release standby time is set to 1.0 sec is lower than the probability that the release standby time is set to 0.5 sec. CS value is allocated.

  In addition, when the opening standby time is set from 1.0 sec (second timing) to 1.3 sec (third timing), the length of the overlapping period with the out-of-balance distribution period does not change (the longest 1. 5 sec.) And overlap with the V distribution period does not occur. Therefore, the value of the open type counter CS is assigned so that the probability set for these open standby times is lower than the probability set for other times.

  If the opening standby time is set after 1.4 sec (fourth timing) after 1.3 sec (third timing), an overlap with the V distribution period occurs. Therefore, although the length of the overlapping period with the out-of-balance distribution period is the same as the length when the longest overlap occurs, the release waiting time is 1.4 sec as the period in which the overlap with the V distribution period occurs. From (fourth timing) to 1.5 sec (fifth timing), the value of the open type counter CS is set to be higher than the probability set to 1.0 sec to 1.3 sec (second timing to third timing). Is allocated.

  When the opening waiting time is set from 1.5 sec (fifth timing) to 2.4 sec (sixth timing) after 1.4 sec (fourth timing), the period overlapping with the out-of-band distribution period gradually increases. (1.5 sec → 0.6 sec). Further, when set in this period, any overlap with the V distribution period occurs, and the length does not change at 0.1 sec. For this reason, the probability that the game ball won in the accessory device 150 is distributed to the out-going side is lower when the opening waiting time is set to 2.4 sec than to be set to 1.5 sec. In other words, the V winning rate increases. Therefore, in the second release timing table, the value of the release type counter CS is assigned such that the probability that the release standby time is set to 2.4 seconds is higher than the probability that the release standby time is set to 1.5 seconds.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 is set to a constant operation from the timing when the winning to the operating ports 38 and 39 is generated, and then the winning to the operating ports 38 and 39 is won. Since the opening waiting time from opening to closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is changed, the probability of V winning in the accessory device 150 can be changed.

  In this embodiment, when changing the probability of V winning, the operation pattern after the opening / closing accessory 168 is in an open state is a uniform pattern. That is, although the V winning probability is changed as described above, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 does not need to be changed greatly, and it is only necessary to change the waiting time before opening (opening waiting time). It has become. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to vary V winning a prize rate with a simple structure.

  In addition, although the 1st release timing table and the 2nd release timing table were provided about the release timing table, a table may be provided in addition to these, and only a 2nd release timing table may be sufficient. Further, in the second release timing table, the opening standby time for increasing the V winning rate is easily selected, but the opening waiting time for decreasing the V winning rate may be easily selected.

  Which release timing table is selected may be determined by lottery or the like. In this case, the probability of winning the lottery (probability of selecting the second opening timing table) may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Although the release timing table selected according to the game state at the time of digestion of the hold information based on the winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 is different, the release timing selected according to the game state at the time of obtaining the hold information It is good also as a structure from which a table differs. For example, with respect to the hold information acquired during the opening / closing execution mode, if the second release timing table is selected or easily selected, the advantage of acquiring the hold information during the opening / closing execution mode is as follows. It is possible to induce a recreational resort and improve the interest. In particular, for example, if the winning device 150 is not easily won in the opening / closing execution mode, it is easy for the player to feel dissatisfied with the fact that it is difficult to obtain a winning ball even though the opening / closing execution mode is in the precious time. On the other hand, if the hold information acquired during the opening / closing execution mode is advantageously handled as described above, even if it is difficult for a prize to be awarded to the accessory device 150 during the opening / closing execution mode, the spilled ball As a result, it is possible not only to alleviate the above-mentioned dissatisfaction but also to realize a new gameability in which the opening / closing execution mode itself is easily connected.

  In addition, with respect to the hold information acquired when the number of hold information is a predetermined number (for example, 2) or more, the hold information is configured so that the second release timing table is selected or easily selected (advantageously handled). The merit of acquiring a lot can be produced. In the first place, the higher the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 is, the easier the winning of the accessory device 150 is. As a result, the opening / closing execution mode is more likely to occur. Further, if the stand is more advantageous for a table that easily stores the hold information as in the above-described configuration, the stand that is more likely to win the operating ports 38 and 39 is more likely to generate the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to increase or decrease the number of balls to be played, and it is possible to improve interest. In addition, for example, setting the operation of the accessory device 150 longer or setting the length of the game times (variable display time) at the time of digestion of the hold information to win a single operation port 38, 39 (hold) As the period from the digestion of information) to the end of the operation of the accessory device 150 is set longer, the hold information becomes easier to accumulate. In such a configuration, there is a possibility that a so-called stopping action for stopping the launch of the game ball is likely to be performed until the operation of the accessory device 150 ends. Therefore, by applying a configuration in which such a configuration is more advantageous as a stand that can easily store the hold information as described above, it is possible to cause the significance of storing the hold information and to suppress the above-mentioned stopping action. It becomes possible.

  Conversely, for the hold information acquired when the number of hold information is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the second release timing table may be selected or easily selected (advantageously handled). . In this way, it is possible to remedy even if a winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 does not occur easily. However, with such a configuration, there is a possibility that the act of repeating the launch and stop of the game ball is likely to be performed so as to make it difficult to store the hold information. Therefore, when adopting the above-described configuration, for example, when the game ball has been continuously fired for a predetermined period or more and the number of the hold information is less than the predetermined number, it may be advantageously handled.

  Further, from the viewpoint of player relief (relief that V prizes are not easily generated), the number of winnings (number of games) to the operation ports 38 and 39 after the completion of one opening / closing execution mode as a gaming state. Depending on the configuration, the ease with which the second opening timing table is selected changes. Specifically, the number of winnings (number of games) to the operation ports 38 and 39 after the completion of one opening / closing execution mode is a predetermined number or more. Then, the second opening timing table may be selected or may be easily selected. In this way, it becomes possible to relieve a so-called stand where the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode does not occur easily, and even such a stand can bring about the significance of continuing the game.

  From the viewpoint of the player's relief, the advantage at the time of using the hold information varies depending on the number of winnings (number of games) to the operation ports 38 and 39 after the completion of one opening / closing execution mode as described above. For example, the advantage may be changed according to the occurrence rate of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time, or the advantage may be changed according to the type of the previous opening / closing execution mode (for example, compared to the 16R continuous mode). It is good also as a structure which raises an advantage when it is an unfavorable continuous fluctuation mode), the presence or absence of generation | occurrence | production of V prize at the time of digestion before this holding information (for example, last holding information), or the accessory apparatus 150 The advantage may be changed depending on whether or not a prize is won.

  In addition, as a configuration for changing the degree of advantage at the time of using the hold information (changing the V winning rate), the configuration may be such that the open / close waiting time is changed as in the present embodiment, or as in the second embodiment. It is good also as a structure which changes an advantage by making it easy to select / it is hard to select a special opening result.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, while the operation pattern of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 is made constant from the digestion timing of the hold information, the pattern change in the main display unit 43 when the hold information is digested The display is executed, and the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is started after the end of the variable display. Hereinafter, a configuration for that purpose will be described.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing game control processing in the present embodiment. As already described, the game control process is a process executed in step S403 of a normal process (FIG. 15) that is periodically started.

  In this embodiment, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the game control process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not an accessory control state is in effect. If it is not in the accessory control state, the process proceeds to step S1703. Note that the processing in steps S1701 and S1702 is the same as the processing in steps S501 and S502.

  In step S1703, it is determined whether or not one game is being executed. Here, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the hold information is the target of the determination of whether or not it is held, the main display unit 43 starts the variable display of the symbol, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information is correct Ending the variable display is set as one game time, and the variable display of the game times is sequentially executed for each hold information. In step S1703, if the counter corresponding to the variable display time set in the variable display time setting process (step S1706) described later is not a predetermined value (eg, “0”), Determine that it is running. It should be noted that at the start of execution of one game round, flags corresponding to various flag storage areas 114e are stored, and the flag is erased at the end of one game round. In step S1703, the presence or absence of the flag is confirmed. It may be configured to determine whether or not one game is being executed.

  If one game is being executed, the game control process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, the process for controlling an accessory is not executed in the opening / closing execution mode or in the accessory control state, or in the case of one game.

  If one game time is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S1704, and it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN is “0”. If it is “0”, the game control process is terminated as it is. This process is the same as the process of step S503.

  If it is determined in step S1704 that the common hold number CRN is not “0” and there is (undigested) hold information that is not the target of the determination, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, data setting processing is executed. This process is the same as the process of step S504 described above, and a process for sequentially setting the values of various counters C1, C2, CS, etc. for the undigested pending information as targets of the determination of success / failure is executed.

  In the subsequent step S1706, a variable display time setting process is executed. In the variable display time setting process, the current common hold number CRN value and the open type counter CS value for the current hold information are acquired, and these values are stored in various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113. By referring to the stored variable display time table, the variable display time of the current game time is specified, and the variable display time of the specified variable display time is provided in the counter for the variable display time provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Execute processing to input information.

  In the variable display time table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46A, the variable display time of each game time is set to be different according to the value of the common hold number CRN. The variable display time is set shorter as the value increases, that is, as the number of stored hold information increases. Which variable display time is set when the value of the common hold number CRN is the same is set at random in increments of 0.1 sec according to the value of the open type counter CS. For example, when the common hold number CRN is “0”, one of the variable display times of 1.0 sec to 2.4 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and the average value is 1 .7 sec. When the common hold number CRN is “1”, one of the variable display times of 0.7 sec to 1.5 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and the average value is 1.1 sec. It is. When the common hold number CRN is “2”, one of the variable display times of 0.5 sec to 1.3 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and the average value is 0.9 sec. It is. When the common hold number CRN is “3” or more, one of the variable display times of 0.1 sec to 0.5 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and the average value is 0.3 sec.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the operation pattern of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 is set such that the V winning rate becomes higher as the period from the hold information digestion timing as the occurrence of the predetermined event is shorter. Specifically, among the distribution members 300 and 310, the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is changed from the non-distribution state to the distribution state in 0.3 sec from the digestion timing of the hold information as the third period. The state is maintained for 1.0 sec as the fourth period. Thereafter, the unallocated state is maintained until the next hold information is consumed. The setting of the operation pattern is set in the distribution setting process (second distribution setting process in step S804) in the control start process (FIG. 19) already described and the distribution process (FIG. 21). In addition, the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is the same as that in each of the above embodiments, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the process of step S1706, the success / failure determination process (same as step S505) is executed in step S1707, the control start process (same as step S506) is executed in step S1708, and the game control process is executed. finish. If it is determined in step S1702 that the accessory control state is in effect, a processing under control (similar to step S507) is executed in step S1709, and a distribution process (same as step S508) is executed in step S1710. After executing and performing a winning process (similar to step S509) in step S1711, the game control process is terminated.

  The relationship between the length of game time variation display time and the V distribution in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 46B, an average value of the variable display time that can be selected according to each common reserved number CRN is shown as an example.

  When the hold information is digested at the timing t1, the second sorting member 310 is displaced from the non-sorting state to the sorting state at the timing t2, which is 0.3 seconds after the third period as described above. And the distribution state is maintained over 1.0 sec which is a 4th period, and it returns to a non-distribution state at the timing of t5.

  For example, when 1.7 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is “0”, the main display unit 43 displays the variable from the timing t1 to the timing t6 that is 1.7 sec later. The game result is displayed as a stop result at the same time t6. For example, when the game result is a (one-time) release result, the opening / closing member 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t6, and the open state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and at the timing of t9. Displaced to the closed state. In other words, as a predetermined event, the opening / closing accessory 168 is set to a release waiting period of 1.7 sec from the digestion of the hold information at the timing t1 to the timing t6, and is displaced to the open state. . In this case, since the second distribution member 310 does not overlap with the distribution period, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed.

  For example, when 1.1 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is “1”, the main display unit 43 displays the variable from the timing t1 to the timing t4 1.1 seconds later. The game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing t4. For example, when the game result is a (one-time) release result, the opening / closing member 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t4, and the open state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and at the timing of t8. Displaced to the closed state. In other words, as a predetermined event, the opening / closing accessory 168 is set to a release waiting period of 1.1 sec from the time when the hold information is digested at the timing of t1 to the timing of t4, and is displaced to the open state. . In this case, since the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (0.2 sec) from the timing t4 to the timing t5, the accessory device 150 at that timing. If a prize is won, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. In other words, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed even if the prize is given to the accessory device 150 other than the timing (a timing that does not overlap with the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state). I will not.

  For example, when 0.9 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common pending number CRN is “2”, the main display unit 43 displays the variable from the timing t1 to the timing t3 after 0.9 sec. The game result is displayed as a stop result at the same timing t3. For example, when the game result is an opening result (one time), the opening / closing member 168 is displaced to the opening state at the timing of t3, and the opening state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and at the timing of t7. Displaced to the closed state. In other words, as a predetermined event, the opening / closing accessory 168 is set to a release waiting period of 0.9 sec from the digestion of the hold information at the timing of t1 to the timing of t3, and is displaced to the open state. . In this case, since the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (0.4 sec) from the timing t3 to the timing t5, the accessory device 150 at that timing. If a prize is won, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. In other words, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed even if the prize is given to the accessory device 150 other than the timing (a timing that does not overlap with the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state). I will not. And the period in which the period during which the prize device 150 can be won and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state overlap is “2”, compared with the case where the common reservation number CRN is “1”. The case is longer. That is, the possibility that the V distribution is performed is higher when the common hold number CRN is “2” than when the common hold number CRN is “1”.

  For example, when 0.3 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is “3” or more, the variable display on the main display unit 43 is displayed from the timing t1 to the timing t2 after 0.3 sec. The game result is displayed as a stop result at the same time t2. For example, when the game result is a release result (once), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2, and the open state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and at the timing of t5. Displaced to the closed state. In other words, as a predetermined event, the opening / closing accessory 168 is set in a release waiting period of 0.3 sec from the digestion of the hold information at the timing t1 to the timing t2, and is displaced to the open state. . In this case, since the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (1.0 sec) from the timing t2 to the timing t5, the accessory device 150 at that timing. If a prize is won, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. Then, the period in which the period during which the prize device 150 can be won and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distributed state overlap is greater than when the common reservation number CRN is “1” or “2”. In the case of “3” or more, the length is longer. That is, the possibility that the V distribution is performed is higher when the common hold number CRN is “3” or more than when the common hold number CRN is “1” or “2”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution display time of the game times is likely to be shortened as the number of the common reserved number CRN is increased, and each distribution member 300 is configured such that the V winning rate is increased as the variation display time is shortened. , 310 is set, the more the hold information is stored, the higher the probability that a V winning will occur. By adopting such a configuration, for example, in a state in which the hold information is easily stored, such as in the opening / closing execution mode, a so-called continuous operation is performed in which a V prize is generated after that (after the opening / closing execution mode) and the operation proceeds to the opening / closing execution mode again. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which villas are easily generated. In addition, a game table in which the hold information is easily acquired becomes a game table in which a V winning is more likely to occur (easily shifted to the opening / closing execution mode), and the range of increase / decrease in the pitch rate is increased, so that it is possible to improve the interest. Become.

  Further, in the case of a configuration having a high frequency support mode in which the frequency of the electric accessory 39a being in an open state is high, winning is awarded to the second operation port 39 by being set to the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the common reserved number CRN is easily stored. That is, it becomes easy to shift to the opening / closing execution mode. In this way, it is possible to substantially change the transition rate to the opening / closing execution mode without changing the operation pattern of each of the sorting members 300 and 310, and the game can be diversified.

  In the above embodiment, the description has been given of the configuration in which the V winning rate is varied by changing the variable display time of each game time. However, the period from the hold information digest timing to the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is changed. As for the configuration for making it open, the meaning is the same as the configuration for changing the opening waiting time as in the second and third embodiments, and in any configuration, the timing until the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is reached. The effect of changing the period can be expected.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as an operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310, the end of the opening / closing execution mode is defined as the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the distribution members 300 and 310 operate periodically after the opening / closing execution mode ends. To do.

  Specifically, in the transition process (step S1214) at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the game state transition process (FIG. 23), a period (first period and The third period) is set (a process for inputting numerical information corresponding to the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter). Then, as shown in FIG. 47, in the normal process in the present embodiment, a distribution process (step S508 in FIG. 16) is executed as one process of the normal process. That is, processing similar to the processing in steps S401 to S404 is executed in steps S1801 to S1804, and distribution processing is executed in step S1805. The processing from step S1806 to step S1810 is the same as the processing from step S405 to step S409.

  Although detailed explanation with the drawings is omitted, in the game control process (step S1803) in the present embodiment, after executing the process during control in step S507, because the above-described distribution process is performed in the normal process, In step S509, the winning process is executed, and the game control process is terminated.

  In the distribution process in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, it is determined in step S1901 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Exit. This is because the setting of the operation of the sorting members 300 and 310 in the opening / closing execution mode is executed in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 23). If it is determined in step S1901 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S1902. In step S1902, it is determined whether or not it is the first distribution control timing as in step S1001. That is, the numerical information of the first distribution counter is grasped, and the first period (the period in which the first distribution member 300 is maintained in the non-distributed state) or the second period (the first distribution member 300 is distributed). It is determined whether it is the end timing of the period during which the state is maintained. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, in step S1903, the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state in the same manner as in step S1002. The first distribution driving unit 300a is drive-controlled so as to be displaced into the minute state. In step S1903, numerical information corresponding to a period during which the displaced state is maintained is set in the first distribution counter.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1902, or after executing the processing of step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, as in step S1003, it is determined whether it is the second distribution control timing. That is, the numerical information of the second distribution counter is grasped, and the third period (the period in which the second distribution member 310 is maintained in the non-distributed state) or the fourth period (the second distribution member 310 is distributed). It is determined whether it is the end timing of the period during which the state is maintained. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state in step S1905, or the non-allocated state from the distributed state in step S1004. The second distribution driving unit 310a is driven and controlled to be displaced to the minute state. In step S1905, a process of setting numerical information corresponding to the period for maintaining the displaced state in the second distribution counter is executed. When a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after the processing of step S1905 is executed, the main distribution processing is terminated.

  Next, the control start process (step S506) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As already described, the control start process is a process started when the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 is started in the game control process (FIG. 16).

  First, in step S2001, processing for grasping the number of times of opening and closing is executed. This process is the same as the process in step S801. In a subsequent step S2002, a process for grasping the distribution status of the first distribution member 300 is executed. Specifically, by grasping the driving state of the first distribution driving unit 300a and the numerical information of the first distribution counter, the current state of the first distribution member 300 is different from the distribution state. A process for grasping the information indicating whether the state is the distribution state and the information of the remaining period during which the state continues is executed. In a subsequent step S2003, a process for grasping the distribution status of the second distribution member 310 is executed. Specifically, by grasping the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a and the numerical information of the second distribution counter, the current state of the second distribution member 310 is different from the distribution state. A process for grasping the information indicating whether the state is the distribution state and the information of the remaining period during which the state continues is executed.

  In subsequent step S2004, based on the processing results in steps S2001 to S2003, an opening / closing timing setting process for setting the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed, and then this control start process is terminated.

  Specifically, in the process of step S2004, the probabilities that the out-of-order distribution by the first distribution member 300 and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 are performed based on the processing results of step S2001 to step S2003 are different. Set the waiting time for opening. The manner in which the opening standby time is set will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 50, for example, after the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t1, the drive control of the first distribution member 300 is periodically performed every time the first period or the second period elapses. A configuration is shown in which the drive control of the second distribution member 310 is periodically performed whenever the period or the fourth period elapses.

  A winning occurs at the timing of t2, the number of releases is grasped as one in step S2001, the first sorting member 300 is in an unsorted state in step S2002, and thereafter (at the timing of t3). Assume that it is understood that the second distribution member 310 is displaced in step S2003 and that the second distribution member 310 is in a non-distributed state and that it is subsequently displaced (at the timing of t6) in step S2003. . In this case, the first distribution member 300 is likely to perform out-of-order distribution, and the second distribution member 310 is less likely to perform V distribution, that is, the V winning rate is reduced. The first waiting time is set as the opening waiting time. Specifically, for example, the opening / closing accessory 168 is set to be in an open state at a timing t4 during a period in which the first distribution member 300 is in a distribution state, and the state is maintained until a timing t6. Set to When set as described above, the first sorting member 300 is disengaged during the period in which the winning device 150 can be awarded (period from the timing t4 to the timing t6) and from the timing t4 to the timing t5. While it overlaps with the period when distribution is performed, it does not overlap with the period when V distribution by the 2nd distribution member 310 is performed.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated at the timing of t8, the number of times of opening is grasped as one in step S2001, the first sorting member 300 is in an unsorted state in step S2002, and thereafter (timing of t9). In step S2003, the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distributed state, and in step S2003, it is determined that the second distributed member 310 is in the non-distributed state. After that, it is assumed that it is displaced to the distribution state (at the timing of t11). In this case, for example, unlike the case of the timing t2, the game state (the number of the common holding number CRN) or the predetermined lottery makes it difficult for the first allocating member 300 to perform the detachment distribution, and The second standby time is set as the open standby time so that the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is easily performed, that is, the V winning rate is increased. For example, the opening / closing accessory 168 is set to be in an open state at a timing t11 which is a period after the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the distributed state to the non-distributed state, and the state is a timing at t15. Set to be maintained until. When set as described above, the first sorting member 300 is disengaged during the period in which the winning device 150 can be awarded (period from the timing t11 to the timing t15) and from the timing t14 to the timing t15. Although the period in which the allocation is performed overlaps, the ratio of the period in which the out-of-order distribution is performed is smaller than that in the case where the first waiting time is set. In addition, the period during which the winning device 150 can be won overlaps with the period in which the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed from the timing t12 to the timing t13, and the first waiting time is set. The ratio of overlapping with the period in which the V distribution is performed is larger than that in the case of the above. That is, the V winning rate is higher when the second waiting time is set than when the first waiting time is set.

  As described above, even in the configuration in which the respective sorting members 300 and 310 are periodically operated, the V winning rate is varied by changing the release waiting time from the digestion timing of the hold information as the occurrence of the predetermined event. Is possible.

  In the above configuration, the waiting time for opening is set differently according to the grasped operation status of each of the sorting members 300 and 310, and the V winning rate is set to be different, but the opening is made so that the V winning rate is the same or substantially the same. It is good also as a structure which sets standby time. Specifically, by grasping the operation status of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 at the time of digestion of the hold information, a period during which the winning device 150 can be won and a period that overlaps with the off-assignment are determined in advance. As a configuration for setting the open standby time so that the first overlapping period (first specific period) or the period overlapping with the V distribution is set as a second overlapping period (second specific period) set in advance Also good. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to suppress the act which aims at a game ball according to the operation | movement condition of the distribution members 300 and 310 which operate | moves periodically, and raises a V winning percentage.

  In the above configuration, the game state at the time when the operation status of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is grasped (for example, the number of stored information stored as in the fourth embodiment, the game after the opening / closing execution mode) The open waiting time may be varied so that the V winning rate varies depending on the number of times or the number of winnings to the operation ports 38 and 39, the time using RTC, or the like.

  In the above configuration, not only the waiting time for opening but also the configuration in which the V winning percentages are made different by changing the period during which the opened state is maintained and the number of times of opening as in the second embodiment.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the rotational position of the rotating body 201 at the time of occurrence of the predetermined event is grasped, and the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is set based on the grasping result. Hereinafter, as the occurrence of the predetermined event, for example, the time of digestion of the hold information in the normal gaming state will be described as the predetermined event.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing timing setting process in the present embodiment. As already described, the opening / closing timing setting process is a process (step S802 in FIG. 19) performed as a control start process (step S506) when the hold information is digested in the game control process (FIG. 16).

  In the present embodiment, first, in steps S2101 to S2104, the same processing as in steps S801 to S804 is executed to grasp the number of times of opening and closing, to set the opening and closing timing, and to set the operation of each sorting member 300 and 310. . In step S2102 in this embodiment, the opening / closing timing is set in the same manner as in step S802. However, as described later, the opening / closing timing may be changed after that, so the opening / closing timing is temporarily set. It can also be called processing.

  In a succeeding step S2104, processing for grasping the current position of the rotating body 201 is executed. More specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotational position detection sensor 196, processing for grasping the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 in the rotating body 201 is executed. In step S2105, based on the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102, the period during which the game ball can be won to the accessory device 150 is grasped, and when the game ball wins in that period, A process of calculating the position of the rotator 201 when the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 reaches the deriving unit 186 is executed based on the timing of reaching the deriving unit 186. More specifically, it is assumed that it takes about 1.0 sec for a game ball won to the accessory device 150 to reach the derivation unit 186 (in this period, the player has won the accessory device 150. The period of the route in which the game ball reaches the deriving unit 186 without being distributed to each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is shown, and this route is also referred to as a normal route in the following description) The V winning opening guide section 204 in the rotating body 201 is in any position during a period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is set to be in an open state, ie, a period that is delayed by 1.0 sec. It is calculated from the detection signal of the rotational position detection sensor 196 whether it is arranged.

  In subsequent step S2107, based on the processing result in step S2106, a process of determining whether or not a V winning can be achieved through the normal route is executed. That is, assuming that the game ball won to the accessory device 150 reaches the deriving unit 186 as a normal route, the V winning opening guide unit 204 of the rotating body 201 can receive the game ball that has reached the deriving unit 186 at that timing. It is determined whether or not it is arranged in the area. If a negative determination is made in step S2107, that is, if V winning is not possible on the normal route, the process proceeds to step S2108, and a change lottery process for determining whether to change the opening / closing timing is executed. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, a lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113, and the open / close timing change lottery is executed based on these. Incidentally, the winning probability of this lottery is set to 10% in this embodiment.

  In step S2109, based on the processing result in step S2108, it is determined whether or not the change lottery has been won. If the change lottery is not won, the open / close timing setting process is terminated. In other words, in this case, the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is performed.

  If it is determined in step S2109 that the change lottery has been won, a first opening / closing timing change process is executed in step S2110. In this process, a process for changing the open / close waiting time is executed so that a V prize can be obtained through the normal route. More specifically, the current V winning opening guide unit 204 of the rotating body 201 grasped in step S2105, the period required for the game ball to reach the deriving unit 186 on the normal route (about 1.0 sec), From the above, it is calculated at which timing the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state, so that it is possible to win the bonus device 150 at a timing at which V winning can be achieved through the normal route. The opening / closing standby time is changed so that the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state. Thereafter, the opening / closing timing setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2107 that the V prize can be obtained through the normal route, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that the distribution (V distribution) by the second distribution member 310 is performed by opening the opening / closing accessory 168 at the timing temporarily set in step S2102. . Specifically, when the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state overlap, the second distribution member It is determined that there is a possibility that V distribution by 310 is performed. When it is determined that there is no possibility that V distribution will be performed, that is, when there is a possibility that a V prize will be generated in the normal route and there is no possibility that V distribution by the second distribution member 310 will be performed. Ends the open / close timing setting process. In this case, the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is performed.

  If it is determined in step S2111 that there is a possibility that V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed, that is, if it is determined that there is a possibility of V winning in either the normal route or the V distribution The process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, processing for temporarily changing the open / close timing (open / close standby time) temporarily set in step S 2102 is executed. More specifically, for example, the opening / closing timing is temporarily changed so that the opening / closing control is started at a timing delayed by a predetermined period (0.5 sec) from the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102. In the subsequent step S2113, it is determined whether or not the V winning can be achieved through the normal route when the opening / closing pattern at the opening / closing timing changed in step S2112 is used. If it is determined in step S2112 that V winning is not possible on the normal route, that is, even if there is a possibility of V winning on the normal route or V allocation at the temporarily set opening / closing timing in step S2102, step S2113 is entered. If there is no V winning in the normal route at the changed opening / closing timing, the opening / closing timing setting process is terminated as it is. In this case, the opening / closing timing temporarily changed in step S2102 is adopted as it is without using the opening / closing timing temporarily changed in step S2112, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2113 that V winning can be achieved through the normal route even if the opening / closing timing changed temporarily in step S2112, the second opening / closing timing changing process is executed in step S2114. From this, the open / close timing setting process is terminated. In the second opening / closing timing changing process, the setting of the opening / closing standby time (ie, the process of re-inputting numerical information corresponding to the standby period counter) is executed so as to apply the opening / closing pattern temporarily changed in step S2112.

  The manner in which the opening / closing timing is changed will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the holding information is digested at the timing t1, and the opening / closing timing 168 is displaced at the timing t4 so that the opening / closing combination 168 is displaced at the timing t4 and is displaced at the timing t4. Assume that provisional setting has been made (step S2102). FIG. 52A shows a case where the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is executed from the timing t5 to the timing t6, and no overlap with the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state occurs. ing. That is, in this case, there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310. However, as a result of the rotation of the rotating body 201 until the game ball that has won the prize device 150 reaches the deriving unit 186, the game ball can be led to the V winning opening guide unit 204 by the deriving unit 186. There is sex. That is, it is a case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2107 and a negative determination is made in step S2111. In this case, the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed at the same opening / closing timing without changing the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102.

  In FIG. 51B, unlike the case of FIG. 51A, there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310, but unlike the case of FIG. The case where there is a possibility of winning is shown. That is, a negative determination is made in step S2107. In this case, if the change lottery is won through the change lottery process in step S2108, the first opening / closing timing change process is performed in step S2110.

  As a changed opening / closing pattern, in pattern 1, the opening / closing standby time is changed (delayed) from the timing of t2 to the timing of t2.1. Note that the timing of t2.1 is earlier than the overlapping timing (timing from 5 to t6) with the V prize. Then, without changing the period during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is maintained open, it is later than the timing of t4 and later than the timing of overlapping with the V distribution (later than the timing of t5 to t6) t4.1. It is displaced to the closed state at the timing. Thereby, the time when the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the time during which the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can be performed overlap.

  Note that the open / close pattern after the change is not limited to the above example, and may be changed as follows.

  As the opening / closing pattern after the change, in pattern 2, the opening / closing standby time is not changed from the timing t2, and the period in which the opening state of the opening / closing accessory 168 is maintained is changed (lengthened). The timing at which the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced into the open state remains t2, but the timing at which it is displaced into the closed state is later than the timing of t4 and later than the overlapping timing with the V distribution (from t5 to t6). It is displaced at the timing of t4.2 (slower than the timing).

  As an open / close pattern after the change, pattern 3 shows an example in which both the open / close standby time and the time during which the open state of the open / close accessory 168 is maintained are shown. That is, in the pattern 3, the opening / closing standby time is changed to a timing t2.2 that is later than the timing t2, and the timing for shifting to the closed state is changed to a timing t4.2 that is later than the timing t4. Note that the timing at t2.2 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V prize (timing from 5 to t6).

  As the opening / closing pattern after the change, in pattern 4, the number of times of opening / closing is changed, and the time when the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state overlaps the time during which the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can be performed. An example of changing the open / close pattern is shown. In this example, the normal opening result that is the number of times of opening is changed to the special opening result that is the number of times of opening shown in the second embodiment, so that overlap with the V distribution occurs. An example is shown, and the opening / closing member 168 that has been displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 is once closed at the timing of t2.3, and then is again displaced to the open state at the timing of t2.4. The timing of t2.4 is earlier than the overlapping timing with V winning (timing from 5 to t6). Then, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t4.2.

  As an open / close pattern after the change, pattern 5 shows an example in which the open / close pattern is changed so that a V prize can be obtained through the normal route based on the positional relationship of the rotating body 201. More specifically, the current position of the V winning opening guide section 204 of the rotating body 201 is grasped, and the V winning opening guide section 204 of the rotating body 201 reaches the deriving section 186 from the rotational speed of the rotating body 201. The period is calculated, and based on the calculation result and the time required for the game ball that has won the winning device 150 to reach the deriving unit 186, the opening / closing timing at which the V winning can be achieved through the normal route is calculated backward. For example, the opening / closing timing is changed so as to be displaced to the open state at the timing of t2.5 as the opening / closing timing calculated in reverse, and to the closed state at the subsequent timing of t4.3.

  In addition, each said change pattern is only an example, and it is good also as a structure changed to another opening / closing pattern. In short, any configuration may be used as long as it is changed to an opening / closing pattern that increases the possibility of V winning when it is determined that the V winning is not generated in the normal route.

  In FIG. 53, when there is a possibility that a V winning will occur in both the normal route and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310, that is, an affirmative determination is made in step S2107 and an affirmative determination is made in step S2111. Shows the case. For example, it is assumed that the hold information is digested at the timing of t1, and the opening / closing timing is temporarily set so that the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t6 ( Step S2102). Further, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is executed from the timing t3 to the timing t4, and an overlap with the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state occurs. Further, the V winning opening guide section 204 of the rotator 201 is also arranged at a position where a V winning can be made on the normal route with a currently set opening / closing pattern.

  In this case, in step S2112, as a temporary change process, for example, a process of temporarily changing the opening / closing standby time so as to be displaced to the open state at a timing t2.1 that is delayed by a predetermined time (0.5 sec) is executed. In this example, the timing of t2.1 is later than the timing at which V distribution is performed (timing from t3 to t4), and there is no possibility of V winning by V allocation in the opening / closing pattern after the temporary change. Further, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2.1, and then is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t6 as described above. That is, in this example, the period during which the open state is maintained is shortened. Then, in step S2113, a process for determining whether or not V winning in the normal route is possible in the temporarily changed opening / closing pattern is performed from the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201, and the provisional change is made. If it is determined that the V winning can be achieved through the normal route even in the open / close pattern, the second open / close timing change process is executed to set the temporarily changed open / close pattern as the current open / close pattern in step S2114. As a result, the opening / closing timing is changed so that only the possibility of V winning in the normal route remains.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is set based on the relationship with the position of the rotating body 201 when digesting the hold information as a predetermined event, each sorting member In addition to the operation patterns of 300 and 310, the operation pattern of the rotator 201 can be taken into consideration, so that the V winning rate can be changed, and the open / close patterns to be set can be diversified. In this case, since only the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is changed without changing the operation pattern of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 and the operation pattern of the rotating body 201, the player feels unfair. This makes it possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

  Based on the result of grasping the position of the rotator 201, it is determined whether or not the V winning can be made through the normal route. If not, the opening / closing pattern can be changed (the first opening / closing timing changing process is performed). It can be implemented). This makes it possible to improve the V winning rate by changing the opening / closing pattern, and to make the player expect the opening / closing execution mode.

  About this 1st opening-and-closing timing change process, when the change lottery process is performed and the said change lottery is won, it is set as the structure which performs the said change process. About change lottery, for example, a winning probability changes with game states etc. It is good also as a structure. Specifically, the number of stored hold information, the number of game times digested after the opening / closing execution mode (the number of holding information), the number of winnings to the operation ports 38 and 39 after the opening / closing execution mode, and per unit time The winning probabilities are different depending on the V winning rate (opening / closing execution mode rate), the number of balls played per unit time (the number of game balls fired and the number of prize balls paid out), etc. It is good.

  Even if the temporarily set open / close pattern is an open / close pattern that can be V-distributed even if V winning is possible through the normal route, a temporary change process is performed, and the temporary change process is performed after the temporary change process. However, if V winning can be achieved through the normal route, the second opening / closing timing changing process for changing to the opening / closing pattern after the temporary change is executed. As a result, when a V prize is generated, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence on the normal route, not on the V distribution. Here, after the game ball enters the accessory device 150 and reaches the ball distribution unit 185 of the guide passage 183, if it is distributed to the warp passage 250, it cannot be distributed to the warp passage 250 (that is, the normal route is changed). The visibility of the game ball is lower than when passing. That is, when the game balls are distributed to the warp passage 250, the operation mode of the game balls is less visible from the front of the gaming machine than when the game balls are not distributed to the warp passage 250. In addition, the game balls distributed to the warp passage 250 are derived so as to win the V prize as they are. On the other hand, the game balls not distributed to the warp passage 250 are subsequently distributed by the first distribution member 300. After winning the minute and the rotator 201, the V prize is won. Therefore, from the viewpoint of paying attention to the operation mode of the game ball, it is easier to increase the effect of focusing on the operation mode if the game ball is not distributed to the warp channel 250 than to distribute to the warp channel 250. Therefore, as described above, when both the normal route and the V distribution are possible, the configuration is such that the opening / closing timing is changed on the condition that the V winning can occur on the normal route even after the change. For example, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of V winnings on the normal route side, and to increase the interest in the operation mode of the game ball.

  In the above configuration, whether or not the V distribution can occur after the temporary change, that is, whether or not the time during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the time during which the V distribution can be performed overlaps. It is good also as a structure which changes a switching pattern so that V winning can be performed by a normal route and V distribution cannot generate | occur | produce. In this way, the effect of generating a V prize on the normal route side can be more reliably achieved. However, in this case, there is a concern about an extreme increase in processing load. On the other hand, as in the above configuration, regardless of whether or not V distribution occurs after the temporary change, if only the normal route side is set as the determination target, the normal route is suppressed while suppressing an increase in processing load. It is possible to achieve an effect due to the occurrence of a V prize on the side.

  Note that the total V winning percentage can be lowered by performing the second opening / closing timing changing process as described above. Specifically, since the open / close pattern that allows V winnings in either the normal route or the V distribution can be changed to an open / close pattern that allows V winnings only in the normal route, As a result, the V winning rate can be lowered. Therefore, for example, when such a second opening / closing timing change process is performed, it is preferable that the benefit is given accordingly. Specifically, the opening / closing execution mode that occurs in the situation where the second opening / closing timing change process is performed is configured so that the 16R continuation mode is easily selected, or when the second opening / closing timing change process is performed, Then, the structure etc. which the probability that the 1st opening / closing timing change process will be performed become high (the probability which wins the change lottery process of step S2108 becomes high) are considered. By doing in this way, while producing the effect by performing a 2nd opening-and-closing timing change process, it can compensate for the fall of V winning a prize suitably by it.

  In the above embodiment, the hold information is digested as the occurrence of a predetermined event in which the operation pattern of each sorting member 300, 310 is set. However, the start of a round game during the opening / closing execution mode is a predetermined event. May occur. In this case, for example, the open / close pattern (A to C) set in each round is set as a temporary open / close pattern, and the possibility of occurrence of a V prize in the normal route in the temporarily set open / close pattern is grasped. The provisionally set metering pattern may be changed.

  In this case, for example, in the change lottery process, the winning probability may be different depending on the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode, or the winning probability may be different depending on the number of opening / closing times (RC2) in one round. For example, if the number of times of opening and closing in one round is set so that the winning probability is lower when the number of times of opening and closing is high than when it is high, a V prize is generated with a small number of times of opening and closing in one round, and the upper limit number of winnings is reached. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that the round ends although it is not satisfied.

  In addition, as a benefit for compensating for a decrease in the V winning rate due to the second opening / closing timing changing process, depending on the number of times the second opening / closing timing changing process is performed during one round, It may be configured to increase the probability of winning. In other words, the more the second opening / closing timing change process is performed, the easier the first opening / closing timing changing process is performed, and the V winning rate is reduced at the time of opening / closing when the second opening / closing timing changing process is performed. However, it is possible to raise interest in the operation mode of the game ball while increasing the V winning rate thereafter and preventing the round continuation rate from decreasing (while increasing the round continuation rate).

  As described above, in the configuration in which the round continuation rate is changed according to the number of times the second opening / closing timing change process is performed, the lottery for change in the one round is determined according to the number of times the second opening / closing timing change process is performed during one round. If the winning probability of the process is increased, the probability that a V prize (continuation of the round) will occur when the rear side is opened and closed in one round can be made higher than when the front side is opened and closed. This not only suppresses the occurrence of inconvenience that the number of rounds is updated as soon as each round continues, but also makes it possible to expect a normal route V prize at a stage where the number of times of opening and closing is small in one round. Thus, it is possible to realize a novel game in which the operation mode of the game ball is enjoyed and the number of times of opening and closing increases and V distribution is more likely to occur as the end of the round is approached.

  Further, in the configuration in which the round continuation rate is changed according to the number of times the second opening / closing timing change process is performed, the number of times the second opening / closing timing change process is performed is reflected in the winning probability of the change lottery process in the next and subsequent rounds. In the configuration, when the V prize is won by the normal route (the round is continued), the subsequent game is treated more advantageously than when the V prize is won by the V distribution (the round is continued). Makes it even more interesting. For example, based on the fact that the number of times the second opening / closing timing change process has been performed becomes a predetermined number or more, the winning probability of the change lottery process may be increased in subsequent rounds, or high continuity in subsequent rounds. It is good also as a structure where the probability that the opening / closing pattern A used as a rate will be selected becomes high.

  Further, not only the number of times the second opening / closing timing change process is performed, but also the number of times that V winning (round continuation) has occurred after the second opening / closing timing change process is reflected in the subsequent round continuation rate It is good.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration that is a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, an opening / closing execution mode can be performed when a prize can be awarded to the accessory device 150 based on a prize at the operation ports 38 and 39 and the prized game ball is further awarded to the V prize opening 182a. In the gaming machine that shifts to, the operation of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is changed by each of the sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201, but the operation of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is changed. The configuration to be changed is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration not including at least one of the distribution members 300 and 310 or a configuration not including the rotating body 201 may be used. In short, in the configuration in which the game balls won in the accessory device 150 are distributed to the V winning port 182a or the outflow port 182b, the distribution may be performed by a distribution unit that performs a predetermined operation. .

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration for changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 as the configuration for changing the winning timing to the accessory device 150 is different. It is only necessary that the V winning rate thereafter can be changed by changing, and the V winning rate is changed not by changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 but by changing the operation pattern of another accessory. It is good also as a structure. However, if the other accessory is an accessory in the accessory device 150, an event may occur in which a V prize is not achieved due to a change in the operation pattern of the other accessory even though a prize has been won in the accessory device 150. This can give the player a feeling of unfairness. Therefore, the other accessory is preferably outside the accessory device 150 that changes the winning timing to the accessory device 150.

  (3) Although the operation start of the sorting members 300 and 310 is set as the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, other timing may be used as long as a predetermined specific event (predetermined event) occurs. . That is, it may be the start timing of the round game, or may be the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the opening or closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 or the start of the round game.

  (4) In the first embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode, the eighth round is the opening / closing pattern B, the eleventh round is the opening / closing pattern C, and the continuation rate is lowered in these rounds. The configuration of the open / close pattern of each round is not limited to the above. For example, all rounds after a predetermined round such as the eighth round may be low continuation rounds such as the open / close pattern B, and all the rounds up to a predetermined round are low continuation rounds and the predetermined rounds and subsequent rounds are high continuation. It is good also as a round (opening-closing pattern A). Also, an opening / closing pattern that is easier to continue than the opening / closing pattern A (V winning probability is high) or an opening / closing pattern that is less likely to be continued than B or C (low V winning probability) may be set. By including these rounds of open / close patterns in the open / close patterns of each round, it is possible to diversify the open / close patterns.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which makes the open / close pattern of all the rounds the open / close pattern (open / close pattern B, C) which is hard to continue. In this case, all rounds may be the open / close pattern B, all rounds may be the open / close pattern C, open / close patterns that are less likely to continue than the open / close patterns B and C, or combinations thereof. Good.

  Furthermore, on the contrary, the open / close pattern of all rounds may be an open / close pattern that is easy to continue (open / close pattern A).

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes the opening / closing execution mode comprised by said each opening / closing pattern with the opening / closing execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation | variation mode in 1st Embodiment. These may be added, or the opening / closing execution modes may be combined and added to the first embodiment.

  (5) In the second embodiment, the V winning probability is changed by changing the pattern of opening and closing twice (opening and closing based on winning in the second operation port 39). The pattern may be changed, and the number of times of opening and closing may be changed. For example, in the configuration in which the opening / closing pattern is changed once, the opening time is set so that the normal opening result is an operation pattern that is difficult to be distributed to the V winning side by the distribution members 300 and 310, and the predetermined result Then, the opening time of the opening / closing accessory may be changed without changing the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 so that the distribution to the V winning side is facilitated.

  (6) As in the second embodiment, the V winning probability is changed according to the game result (the opening / closing pattern is changed), and the result is changed according to the game state (special opening A result or special opening B result). It is good also as a structure from which the probability of differs.

  (7) The configuration for improving the V winning probability has been described in detail as the configuration for changing the V winning probability by changing the open / close pattern, but the configuration for reducing the V winning probability may be adopted.

  (8) Even if the distribution members 300 and 310 are not provided, by opening and closing patterns different from each other, it is possible to provide an open / close pattern that is almost V-winned (distributed to the V-winning side) if the winning device 150 is won. Good. In this case, the rotation position of the rotating body 201 may be grasped and the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 may be determined. Even in this configuration, the V winning probability can be changed without changing the operation pattern of the rotator 201.

  (9) As a configuration for changing the open / close pattern by grasping the rotational position of the rotating body 201 and changing the V winning probability, for example, the following configurations are also conceivable.

  As a game result (result table) based on winning in the operation ports 38 and 39, a special opening C result capable of changing the opening / closing pattern is provided. When this special opening C result is obtained, the position of the rotating body 201 is grasped based on the detection result of the rotational position detection sensor 196. For example, when a game ball won in the accessory device 150 is not distributed to the distribution members 300 and 310, a period until the game ball is derived from the deriving unit 186 to the recess 182 (ball guiding unit 202) is defined as an arrival period. Then, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is set based on the relationship between the arrival period and the period during which the V winning opening guide unit 204 rotates to the position corresponding to the derivation unit 186. In this way, it is possible to set a pattern in which a V winning is likely to occur when the opening / closing accessory 168 is in an open state without changing the operation pattern of the rotating body 201.

  (10) In each of the above-described embodiments, it takes about 0.3 sec for the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 to reach the position to be distributed by the second distribution member 310, and the first distribution member The passage length is set so that it takes about 0.2 sec from the position on the second sorting member 310 side to reach the position to be distributed by 300, but this structure is changed. Depending on the relationship between the period in which the opening / closing member 168 is in the open / closed state and the period in which the respective sorting members 300 and 310 are in the distributed state as described above, It is also possible to change the probability of being distributed to the V winning side.

  (11) In the above embodiment, the mode of support by the electric accessory 39a is set so as not to be different, but a plurality of types of support modes may be set so that the mode of support is different. Specifically, for example, as a support mode, when compared in a situation where a game ball is continuously launched in a similar manner to the game area, the electric accessory 39a of the second working port 39 is released per unit period. The low frequency support mode (or low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (or high frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high or low.

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric utility item 39a is in the open state when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one open period is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 39a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The period is set shorter than one open period. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum securing period (i.e., after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed, compared to the low frequency support mode (that is, The one display continuation period in the accessory display 44 is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operation port 39 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the probability that the accessory device 150 is in an open state is also high, and the probability of V winning (occurrence of jackpot) is also high. Further, as in the second embodiment, the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 differ not only in the number of times of opening / closing member 168 but also in the game result (big hit type). In the mode (high frequency support mode) in which the winning probability to the second operation port 39 is increased, the game result set for the second operation port 39 (a jackpot type, special opening A, B in the second embodiment) is obtained. Probability increases. In addition, if the winning to the second operating port 39 frequently occurs, the associated winning balls can also be obtained frequently, and as a player, the player does not reduce the number of balls held in this high frequency support mode. While playing, you can play games. In this way, the advantage can be changed using the level of the support mode, and the game can be diversified.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the electric power release state per unit period as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. In addition, a securing period (for example, on the display part 44 for an accessory based on a winning to the through gate 41) secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display periods) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short reservation period is easier to select or the average reservation period is shorter than the low frequency support mode. May be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening period is lengthened, and the securing period that is secured after the next drawing of the electric utility product is performed is shortened. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average period of the reservation period and increasing the winning probability. .

  (12) In the second embodiment, the game result table is made different between the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39, so that the level of advantage is increased. As in the embodiment, the same result table may be used. Specifically, a special opening A result and a special opening B result may be provided in the result table for the first working port. In this case, since the opening is performed twice in spite of winning the first operating port 38, the player feels profitable, and in these special opening A result and special opening B result Since the V winning probability increases, even if it is difficult to win the second operating port 39, it is expected that a special opening A result will be obtained by winning the first operating port 38 side. It becomes possible.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, the description is made on the assumption that the hold information is acquired based on the winnings to the respective operation ports 38 and 39 and the hold information is stored up to a predetermined number (four each). However, the hold information may not be stored. In this way, the configuration can be simplified. However, in the configuration in which the hold information is not stored as described above, for example, when the winning of the operating port 38, 39 occurs again during the control of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the operating port 38, 39, etc. However, since the opening / closing role 168 is not released even though a winning is made to the operating ports 38 and 39, the player may feel lost, so the interest in the game is reduced. There is no doubt. Moreover, in the said embodiment, it is the structure which can win not only the accessory apparatus 150 but the action | operation ports 38 and 39 during opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, in the configuration on the side where the hold information is stored, if the corresponding hold information is digested after the opening / closing execution mode and a V prize is generated by opening / closing the opening / closing accessory 168 accompanying the digestion of the hold information, the opening / closing is performed. The execution mode will be extended. As a result, it is possible to make the game premised on the occurrence of the reed villa, and to improve the interest of the game. However, in a predetermined state, for example, when a winning is made to the operation ports 38 and 39 during the control of the accessory device 150 or during the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information is acquired. May be configured not to acquire the hold information. In this way, it is possible to suppress giving a player a sense of loss when winning is made to the operation ports 38 and 39 during the control of the accessory device 150 or during the opening / closing execution mode as described above. .

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which is easy to become a special opening A result or a special opening B result as a game result of the hold information acquired in said predetermined state. Generally, the player expects to win a prize for the opening / closing role 168 while the opening / closing role 168 is opened. Then, if the holding information is acquired as described above when the opening / closing combination 168 is not won while the opening / closing combination 168 is opened, the opening / closing combination 168 is not won. However, it can be expected to win the operating ports 38 and 39. In addition, if the game result based on the winning is the special opening A result or the special opening B result (the result of the opening / closing pattern in which V winning is likely to occur) as described above, It is possible to make a novel game in which a prize is expected not only on the object 168 side but also on the operation ports 38 and 39. In this way, it is possible to further improve interest.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the opening / closing pattern 168 has different opening / closing patterns such as the opening / closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, C1 to C2, and the special opening A result or the special opening B result. The V winning probability is changed without changing the operation pattern of each of the drive units 300, 310, and 201 in the apparatus 150. However, these open / close patterns and the operation patterns of the drive units 300, 310, and 201 are examples. And it is good also as a structure which changes V winning probability by the combination of another pattern.

  (15) In the second embodiment, the V winning probability is made different from the other opening (normal opening result) in the first opening start timing of the opening / closing member 168 in the special opening A result or the special opening B result. However, the V winning probability may be changed by changing the first opening start timing. In this case, for example, in the case of the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the opening timing corresponding to the operation pattern of each drive unit 300, 310, 201 in the accessory device 150 is set regardless of the opening type counter CS. It is good also as a structure to set. If the opening timing is configured to be notified by, for example, the symbol display device 51 or the like (character display such as “Let me win a prize after XX seconds!”), The degree of attention to the game can be further increased. On the other hand, when it is configured not to notify the opening timing (notifying only that the result is a special opening A, B result such as “Chance when winning!”), It becomes possible to suppress aim shooting, and V winning depending on the skill level of the player The level of the rate can be eliminated and the fairness of the game can be secured.

  (16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the main control device 81 has a detection means (sensor) for detecting fraud and a means for executing a process corresponding to the detection result based on the detection result (for example, a normal activation is performed periodically) It is good also as a structure which has (added as one process in a process). In particular, in the above-described embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode is started by the V winning for the accessory device 150, and the round game can be continued by the V winning. Therefore, the act of illegally generating the V winning for the accessory device 150 is performed. is assumed. For example, this action may be caused by magnetism, radio waves, or vibration, and a detection sensor that detects them (magnetism, radio waves, vibration, etc.) is provided, and the progress of the game is stopped based on the detection result of the detection sensor. It is good to have a structure which performs notification to a game hall and notification (external output). Further, in the second embodiment, since an opening / closing pattern with an increased V winning probability is set, the opening / closing pattern, that is, winning in the second operating port 39 (detection by the sensor 39c) is illegal. The winning action (detection of the sensor 39c) to the second operating port 39 is illegal at a timing that is likely to result in a special opening A result or a special opening B result by reading the update period of the jackpot random number counter C1 by some method, etc. It is also envisaged that actions will occur. That is, by providing a configuration (detection sensor for magnetism, radio waves, vibration, etc. and means for performing processing based on the detection result) that suppresses the act of illegally generating an open / close pattern that increases the V winning probability like these, While increasing the probability of winning and improving the interest, it is possible to suppress the act of generating it illegally.

  (17) As in the above-described embodiments, in the case of a configuration in which the level of the support state by the electric accessory 39a is not provided, the electric accessory 39a or the through gate 41 itself may not be provided. In this way, the configuration can be simplified.

  (18) In each of the above embodiments, if a V prize is generated in the open / close control during the normal gaming state, a V win flag is set (step S1104), the open / close control is terminated, and the open / close execution mode is continued. However, the opening / closing control may be continued even if a V prize is generated. In this way, the winning device 150 can be won even after the V winning during the opening / closing control, and the winning device 150 is likely to win (that is, a privilege based on that, a prize ball) However, since the V prize has occurred, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that makes it impossible to win the prize device 150 and causes the player to feel lost. On the other hand, when a V prize is generated, it is notified immediately and the configuration for shifting to the open / close execution mode is closer to the occurrence timing of the V win and the open / close execution mode. It becomes clear whether the ball has generated a V prize and has shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the operation mode of the game ball. Therefore, in order to solve these conflicting problems, for example, the operation pattern of the rotating body 201 and each of the sorting members 300 and 310 is grasped, and in the opening / closing control based on the one holding information, a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150. The open / close pattern may be set so that the V winning rate is higher when it occurs at the later timing (second timing) than when it occurs at the earlier timing (first timing). In this way, in the first place, the occurrence of the V winning is configured so that the later timing in one opening / closing control is more likely to occur, and after the V winning occurs, the event that the winning to the accessory device 150 may further occur. It can be made difficult to generate itself.

  (19) The timing at which the V prize is generated may be set in relation to the launching period of the game ball. More specifically, for example, when the opening and closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is maintained for a period (for example, 0.3 sec) shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec), In the period in which the open state is maintained, winning in the accessory device 150 is less likely to occur. However, for example, even if a period shorter than the game ball firing cycle is set as a period for maintaining the open state, depending on the game ball launch timing, it reaches the accessory device 150 in a state in which the game ball is in the open state. You may get (you can win). As described above, the V winning rate changes depending on the operation pattern of each of the sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 if a prize is received in the accessory device 150. Therefore, in the opening / closing timing setting process, the launching period of the game ball is grasped, and based on the launching period, the presence / absence of a possibility of winning a prize for the accessory device 150 is grasped, and the V winning rate is changed based on that. The open / close pattern may be set so that the

  (20) The inlet sensors 179 may be provided in correspondence with the left and right opening / closing accessories 168, respectively. That is, in each of the above embodiments, the same entrance sensor 179 is used to detect the opening / closing accessory 168 from any of the winning accessory devices 150. However, each entrance sensor is provided with a separate entrance sensor. It is good also as a structure which detects the winning of a game ball with a separate entrance sensor. In this way, when a winning to the accessory device 150 occurs, it can be detected more quickly, and in a configuration in which the V winning rate differs depending on the left and right winning paths, a notification corresponding thereto ( For example, when winning a prize from the winning path on the side where it is easy to win V, a notification to that effect can be performed. More specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on the left side in the guide passage 183. For example, the rate of distribution to the left guide passage 183 differs depending on the left and right winning paths. In this case, it is considered that the player is more interested in winning a prize from a winning path having a high rate of distribution to the right guide passage 183. Therefore, if the winning is configured to be notified after winning, the player does not always have to be interested in the operation of the game ball, and can enjoy the game leisurely. In such a configuration in which the V winning rate differs depending on the left and right winning paths, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 can be changed without changing the operation patterns of the respective sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 as in the above-described embodiment. If the invention of changing the V winning rate by changing the opening / closing pattern is applied, it becomes possible to change the V winning rate more strictly and diversify the game.

  (21) In each of the above embodiments, the game balls that have been distributed by the second distribution member 310 (V distribution) are always V-winned, but a configuration in which a part of the game balls are awarded to the off-side. Also good.

  (22) As a result of judgment (game result), a special opening A result and a special opening B result having different opening / closing patterns are provided in addition to a normal opening result, a disengagement result, a direct hit result, although the number of opening is the same. However, other results may be provided. For example, results of different opening times (results of opening twice in the result table for the first working port, results of opening once in the result table for the second working port), or opening of the same opening times You may provide the result (result which becomes longer than usual, and result which becomes short) etc. from which the period for which a state is maintained differs. Even using these results, it is possible to adjust the V winning rate from the relationship between the period during which the open state is maintained in the results and the operation patterns of the sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201.

  (23) In the normal gaming state, the opening / closing pattern is made different by using the result of the determination (game result), but the following configuration may be applied. For example, a counter that determines whether or not the game is successful and a counter that determines the type of game result are provided. Then, in the determination using the counter for determining whether or not it is correct, only whether or not to open is determined, and in the determination using the counter for determining the type of game result, the type of opening / closing pattern (that is, the second implementation) It is determined whether it is a normal opening or a special opening as in the form). In this way, the processing configuration of each determination process can be simplified. For example, in the configuration in which the prefetch notification is performed using the hold information, only the release result is used as the prefetch notification. If it is the structure which performs alerting | reporting, it will suffice to read only the counter for performing the determination of whether it is the hold information, and simplification of the structure regarding prefetch alerting | reporting can also be achieved.

  (24) As the hold information, the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired at the time of winning the operating ports 38 and 39, and the type of the opening / closing execution mode (jackpot type) is determined using the jackpot type counter C2. A configuration may be used in which a counter for determining the type of the opening / closing execution mode is acquired at the time of winning V and the type of the opening / closing execution mode is determined based on the counter. In this way, it is possible to omit the process of acquiring the counter used at the time of winning a V when winning the operating ports 38 and 39 even though no V winning has occurred, and the processing configuration is simplified. Can be achieved. However, for example, when determining the opening / closing pattern, the configuration reflects the type of the opening / closing execution mode at the time of V winning, in detail, for example, in the continuous variation mode in which the V winning rate is increased / decreased in the 16R continuous mode. If there is a configuration such as increasing / decreasing the V winning rate if any, a configuration in which a jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the opening / closing execution mode is acquired as the hold information is preferable. In addition, a configuration for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode in the case of winning V at the opening / closing control corresponding to the hold information at the time of opening / closing control execution or pre-read notification (for example, “Get here 16R continuation mode get! In such a case, it is preferable that the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the opening / closing execution mode is acquired as the hold information.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing execution mode is started by detecting the V winning in the winning process in the game control process, but may be changed as follows. That is, the first round in the opening / closing execution mode is started based on the winning at the operation ports 38 and 39, and in the game control process, the presence / absence of the first round is determined by the presence / absence of the V winning. To do. In this case, in the first round (RC1) of the opening / closing execution mode based on the winning at the first operating port 38, a round game with one opening number (RC2) is easy to be executed, and the winning at the second operating port 39 is performed. In the first round (RC1) of the opening / closing execution mode based on the above, it is assumed that a round game having two opening times (RC2) is easily executed. Then, at each opening / closing number of times in the first round of the opening / closing execution mode based on a winning at each operating port 38, 39, the opening / closing member 168 is made without differentiating the operation patterns of the sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201. By changing the opening / closing pattern, the V winning rate is made different and the continuation rate of the round game is made different. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve unique effects due to the above-described characteristic configurations.

  (26) In each of the above-described embodiments, the digestion order (the order to be determined for success / failure) of the hold information based on the winning to the first working port 38 and the hold information based on the winning to the second working port 39 Although the hold information based on winning in the second working port 39 is prioritized, the order of obtaining the hold information may be used. For example, the determination of whether or not the hold information is based on winning in the second operating port 39 is more advantageous than the determination of whether or not the holding information is based on winning in the first operating port 38 (an open / close pattern in which V winning is likely to occur). In the configuration in which the player can perform setting), there is a desire for the player to first determine whether or not the hold information is based on the winning information based on the winning to the second operating port 39 as in the above embodiment. There is also a desire to postpone it (the opening / closing pattern in which V winning is likely to occur is set later) and to execute the determination of the hold information based on the winning to the first operating port 38 first. By entrusting the player's swaying feeling to a random order unintended by the player, such as a winning order to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39, the game becomes more diverse. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when a configuration in which the winning rate to the second operating port 39 is changed using the level of the support mode of the electric accessory 39a is applied, the hold based on the winning to the second operating port 39 as in each of the above embodiments. In the configuration in which the determination of whether or not the information is correct is given priority, because the winning to the second working port 39 frequently occurs, the order of determining whether or not the holding information is determined based on the winning to the first operating port 38 can be continued. The difference between the winning timing for the first operating port 38 and the timing for determining whether or not to hold information based on the winning can be large. If the difference between the winning timing and the timing for determining whether or not the winning is large, for example, even if a fraudulent act such as making a winning / nothing determination is executed even though no winning has occurred, the manager of the game hall It can be difficult to see through. And the inconvenience that a fraudulent act may become easy to be performed by the discovery of a fraudulent act being delayed is considered. For this reason, if the winning / failing determination is performed in accordance with the winning order as described above, the deviation between the winning timing and the winning / failing determination timing can be minimized, and as a result, it is possible to prevent fraud. Become.

  (27) As an example of a configuration in which the number of hold information of the hold information based on winning to each of the operation ports 38 and 39 is stored with an upper limit of 4 as an example, it may be less than 3 or 5 It may be more than the number, or the upper limit storage number of the hold information based on the winnings to the respective operation ports 38 and 39 may be different. For example, it is good also as a structure which can memorize | store one hold information in each operating port 38 and 39, respectively. In this way, for example, the possibility that a extended resort after the opening / closing execution mode is induced due to excessive accumulation of hold information during the opening / closing execution mode is reduced, and mild playability is reduced by reducing the amount of increase / decrease in the number of balls to be played. It becomes possible.

  (28) The on-hold light emitting units 54 to 56 may be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. The symbol display device 51 is configured to be provided on the top of the accessory device 150, and the player operates the game ball around the accessory device 150, such as winning a prize to the accessory device 150 and then winning a V prize. It is considered that the aspect is highly interested, and if the number of pending information is displayed in a place close to such a place of interest (that is, the display screen G), it will naturally enter the field of view. it is conceivable that. In this way, it is possible to consolidate information and make it easy to understand the game, as compared to a configuration in which different notifications are made using various locations. However, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the type (15R continuation mode, continuation variation mode) is notified on the display screen G, and the number of holdings is notified on the display screen G. With this configuration, when the type of the opening / closing execution mode is notified, the display of the information on the number of holdings is deleted, or the type of the opening / closing execution mode is notified while leaving the information on the number of holdings. In the former case, there is a disadvantage that it is impossible to confirm the number of hold information when the notification of the type of opening / closing execution mode is performed, and in the latter case, the production area becomes small. Thus, there may be a disadvantage that the notification itself of the type of opening / closing execution mode may be sober. Therefore, for example, if the display unit G has the hold light emitting units 54 to 56 and displays the number of hold information on the display screen G, even if the display of the number of hold information on the display screen G is deleted, Can be confirmed by the holding light emitting units 54 to 56, and various information can be suitably displayed in accordance with the timing.

  (29) In each of the above embodiments, the game control process is configured such that the subsequent hold information is not digested if it is in the accessory control state, but may be changed as follows. That is, it is determined whether or not a winning game ball has been awarded to the accessory device 150 during the accessory control state, and whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the V winning sensor 192 or the removal sensor 193, That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball won in the accessory device 150 is still present in the accessory device 150. If the game ball is still present in the accessory device 150, the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed. Even if the control state is finished, the subsequent hold information is not digested. In this way, it is possible to increase awareness of the game, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  (30) In each of the above-described embodiments, based on the occurrence of a V prize for the accessory device 150, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and in the opening / closing execution mode, a prize for the accessory device 150 is likely to occur. However, the opening / closing execution mode may be executed by another winning device. For example, a variable pitching device is provided that can displace a game ball flowing down the game area between an open state where the ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Based on the occurrence of a winning or the like, the main controller 81 controls the variable pitching device to be in an open state. The opening / closing execution mode of the 16R continuous mode may be executed in the variable winning device, or the opening / closing execution mode of the continuous variation mode may be executed in the variable winning device. In the former case, in the continuous variation mode, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is changed to change the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 by adjusting the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 and adjust the continuation rate of the round game. It is possible. In the latter case, a V winning opening and a winning winning opening are provided in the variable winning device, and a distribution unit for distributing the winnings to each winning opening is provided upstream of each winning opening. This distribution unit is operated in a predetermined operation pattern to distribute the game balls won to the variable winning device into a V winning opening and a winning winning opening. Then, as the continuous variation mode, the timing for switching between the open state and the closed state is changed so as to change the winning timing for the variable winning device without changing the operation pattern of the distribution unit, and the V winning award is entered. Adjust the winning percentage. If it does in this way, it will become possible to change to the structure which changes the continuation rate of a round game in the accessory apparatus 150, or to implement | achieve it with another winning device.

  (31) The game ball that has been subjected to V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is configured to be led out to the warp passage 250 as a region in which the visibility from the front of the game machine is lower than that. A configuration in which a V prize is generated through a region where visibility from the front does not change may be employed, or a configuration in which a V prize is generated through a region in which the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is improved. In this way, the fact that the V distribution has been performed not only decreases the visibility of the game ball, but can be easily confirmed by the subsequent operation mode of the game ball. In particular, in the configuration in which the greatest attention is paid to whether or not a V prize is generated as in the case of the pachinko machine 10, it is easier to increase the degree of attention by making the V allocation more conspicuous. It is considered to be. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the visibility from the front of the gaming machine does not decrease (does not change / improves) during V distribution as in the above configuration, the subsequent operation of the game ball can be made fully visible, It is preferable for increasing the degree of attention.

  However, from the viewpoint of suppressing the act of aiming so as to intentionally generate the V distribution, the visibility of the game ball after the V distribution is performed and the location where the V distribution is performed ( It is preferable that the visibility of the region in which the second distribution member 310 is provided is not excessively increased.

  In that respect, in each of the above embodiments, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 with relatively low visibility from the front of the gaming machine and the first distribution member 300 with relatively high visibility from the front of the gaming machine. Since the V winning rate is changed by the combination of the movement pattern of both of the allocating members 300 and 310, the first allocating member 300 causes inconvenience due to a decrease in visibility from the front of the gaming machine. In addition to covering, inconvenience due to improved visibility from the front of the gaming machine is covered by the second sorting member 310, and by coexisting both, it is possible to compensate each inconvenience of high and low visibility It has become.

  (32) The game balls won to the accessory device 150 are discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V prize passage 191a or the detachment passage 191b, and the discharged game balls are passed through a discharge passage (not shown). However, it may be configured to be discharged to the game area as the outside of the accessory device 150.

  (33) By changing the opening / closing standby time and the game time variation display time, the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotator 201 from the time of digestion of the hold information and the end of the opening / closing execution mode as the occurrence of the predetermined event The V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is changed without changing the operation pattern. However, as in the second embodiment, the first and second open states are set as a two-time open / close pattern. The V winning rate can be increased by applying the configuration in which the period during which the game is maintained is different or the configuration in which the waiting time is changed between the open state and the open state of the first and second times individually or in combination. It is good also as composition changed.

  (34) In the ninth embodiment, the variation display time is shortened as the common holding number CRN increases, and as a result, the overlap with the V distribution is likely to occur. However, the timing at which the V distribution is performed. It is good also as a structure which becomes easy to generate | occur | produce duplication with V distribution, so that it is set late | slow and fluctuation display time becomes long. In this case, the variable display time may be longer as the common holding number CRN is larger, and as the common holding number CRN is larger, the period during which the open state of the opening / closing accessory 168 is maintained is set longer. It is good also as a structure which becomes easy to generate | occur | produce duplication with minutes.

  (35) In the ninth embodiment, the variable display time is set according to the common hold number CRN regardless of the gaming state. However, the mode is to set the variable display time according to the common hold number CRN. A mode that is not so may be set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), as a jackpot type, in addition to the 16R continuation mode and the continuous variation mode in each of the above embodiments, a jackpot result for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode is set. . The opening / closing execution mode of the 2R continuous mode is an opening / closing execution mode in which a round game is performed only twice (or only once). For example, even if a continuation condition is established by winning a V in the second round, the opening / closing execution mode is It shall end. Therefore, it is assumed that the opening / closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode has fewer prize balls than the other opening / closing execution modes.

  FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time of the present modification. The variable display time setting process is a process executed in step S1706 of the game control process (FIG. 45).

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a special mode. The special mode is a mode that is set when the previous opening / closing execution mode is the 2R continuation mode, and is set in the opening / closing execution mode end process (step S1215) in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 23). Is done. If the current gaming state is not in the special mode, a process of setting a predetermined time (for example, 0.7 sec) set in advance as a variable display time in step S2202 is executed, and this setting process is terminated. In this case, a V distribution can occur if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150 immediately after the opening operation of the opening / closing accessory 168 starts, but no V distribution occurs otherwise.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the special mode, the variable display time (see FIG. 46A) corresponding to the common hold number CRN is set in step S2203, and then this setting process is ended. As already described, the variable display time at which the V distribution is more likely to occur can be selected as the common reserved number CRN increases. Since the common hold number CRN tends to increase during the opening / closing execution mode (holding information is easily stored), the occurrence rate of the opening / closing execution mode is increased by setting the special mode.

  In this way, even after the opening / closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode, which is not advantageous to the player, it becomes easier to shift to the opening / closing execution mode after that, and compensation that is not advantageous can be performed.

  In the above configuration, in the 2R continuation mode, it is preferable that the round game is continued until the upper limit number of winnings is reached even if a V winning is generated during the round game. By doing in this way, it becomes easy to increase the common reservation number CRN during the opening / closing execution mode, and it is possible to expect the extended resort after the opening / closing execution mode.

  Further, in the above configuration, a distribution table for each mode may be provided so that the 2R continuation mode is easily selected in the V winning in the special mode (occurrence of jackpot). By doing in this way, it is possible to create a new game in which the 2R continuation mode with a small number of balls is continuously extended, and as a result, a large number of balls can be obtained.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, during the special mode, for example, if the support state of the electric accessory 39a is performed, the common reservation number CRN can be easily stored, and as a result, the open / close execution mode can be expected.

  (36) The jackpot type described in each of the above embodiments is an example, and other jackpot types may be provided. For example, even in the 2R continuous mode, if the V-winning does not occur in the first round, an upper limit of the number of rounds may be provided in the continuous variable mode so that it ends in one round. It is good also as a structure from which the selection rate of an opening / closing pattern differs in a round. For example, a 5R continuous variation mode jackpot is provided in which the upper limit of the number of rounds in the continuous variation mode is 5 rounds, and the 5R continuous variation mode A in which a round opening / closing pattern A having a high round continuation rate is easily selected in each round, and each round The 5R continuous variation mode B in which the open / close pattern B having a low round continuation rate is easily selected may be provided.

  (37) In each of the above embodiments, the game state is changed from the previous game state to the predetermined game state because the game state is shifted to the accessory control state or the game turn is started based on the digestion of the hold information. The game state is changed from the previous game state to the predetermined game state based on the fact that the hold information is digested and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 168 is started as a result of the determination of whether or not It can be said that the game state has changed, and based on the end of the opening / closing execution mode, it can be said that the gaming state has changed from the previous gaming state to a predetermined gaming state.

  (38) In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing accessory 168 may perform a predetermined operation based on the fact that the hold information is digested, that is, at the start of the opening standby time or at the start of the game time. . The predetermined operation is, for example, an operation that suggests that a game ball cannot enter the accessory device 150 but moves slightly from the closed state to the open state, and can enter the open state. Conceivable.

  (39) Each of the above inventions can also be applied to the following configurations. That is, in the game board 24, unit switching control (so-called round) is performed in which a switching is performed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter in the open state. A variable pitching device capable of playing games) is provided. And based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, that the lottery result based on the winning to one of the operation ports 38, 39 was a big hit result, that it was notified by a predetermined notification unit) Then, as a state advantageous to the player, a transition is made to a special gaming state (so-called jackpot state) in which unit switching control of the variable pitching device is performed a plurality of times. Further, in the variable pitching device, the distribution that sorts whether the game ball that has entered the device is passed to the first passage (for example, V zone) or the second passage (normal zone) that is different from the first passage. Equipment is provided. In the special game state, it is possible to shift to the next unit switching control on condition that the first passing unit is passed during one unit switching control. Even in such a configuration, if the switching timing in the unit switching control is changed, the passing rate to the first passage section side (that is, the continuation of the unit switching control is continued without changing the sorting timing on the sorting device side). Rate) can be varied. In this way, for example, the number of times the unit switching control is actually performed by changing the continuation rate while notifying the upper limit of the number of times (number of rounds) that the unit switching control is performed in one special gaming state. A game such as paying attention to (passing to the first passage portion) can be realized. That is, not only a simple game such as entering a variable pitching device, but also a timing for entering a variable pitching device, a timing for opening a variable pitching device, and a flow-down mode of a gaming ball, etc. It is possible to realize a game that attracts attention, and to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

  (40) In the configuration of (39) above, the passing condition of the game ball on the first passing portion side is set as the continuation condition in the unit switching control, but it may be changed as follows. For example, based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established (for example, that a lottery result based on winning in one of the operating ports 38, 39 was a big hit result, that it was notified by a predetermined notification unit) The variable pitching device is controlled to be switched to the open state. By passing the game ball to the first passing portion in the open state, the variable pitching device or the Is configured to shift to a special gaming state (so-called jackpot state) in which unit switching control of different variable pitching devices is performed. Even in such a configuration, if the timing for the open state (or the closed state) is changed, the passing rate to the first passage portion (special game) can be changed without changing the distribution timing on the distribution device side. The rate of transition to the state can be changed. That is, the occurrence rate of the special gaming state is changed not only by the winning probability of the lottery based on the entrance to the operation ports 38 and 39, but also by the opening / closing pattern of the variable entrance device as well as the entrance rate to the variable entrance device. This makes it possible to diversify games.

  (41) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. The present invention also relates to a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window after the reel stops. Can be applied.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

  The following feature group is known as “a game machine such as a pachinko machine, which includes a variable pitching device provided in a game area (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a game machine, for example, a game area The game state shifts to a specific control state triggered by the passing of the game ball through the operating port provided in the case.In this case, the variable pitching device is opened for a predetermined period, and the variable pitching device is connected to the variable pitching device. As a specific event (predetermined event), for example, a game ball enters a variable ball entry device and an advantage such as a V prize opening provided for the game ball in the variable ball entry device is provided. Regarding the background art of “here, the variable pitching device or other variable pitching device is continuously opened and closed in a predetermined manner based on the fact that the ball has entered the mouth”. And in gaming machines, attention to games is high. For example, in the pachinko machine described above, it is desired to devise a technique such as diversifying the manner of entering a ball into the V prize opening or the like. " is there.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A variable receiving means (serving function) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Material device 150),
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means based on occurrence of a predetermined event (entrance to the operation ports 38 and 39 or start of a round game). (A function for executing the opening / closing process by the main control device 81 and a function for executing the game control process);
A first passage portion (V winning path 191a) and a second passage portion (outward passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing section, a privilege granting means (a function for executing the opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of the round game or occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode) to the player. And a function to execute a winning process)
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in an undistributed state, and the second distribution member 310 If there is a distribution state) and a second aspect that is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion than the first aspect (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 If not, the sorting means (sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
With
The variable acceptance control means includes
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (that is, the opening / closing pattern A, the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the second opening timing table is selected, That the number of the hold information is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, that the grasping result of the operation status of the sorting members 300 and 310 is the predetermined result, and that the number of game times from the opening / closing execution mode is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times, At the first timing based on the fact that the winning lottery in the changing lottery process has been won, and that a V-winning is possible on the normal route even after the temporary change, such as a condition that makes it easy for a V-winning to occur. First switching execution means for executing the state switching control (a function for executing the process for the opening / closing pattern A in the setting process for each round by the main controller 81 and the setting process for each opening, the control start process, Function for executing processing for special release A result and special release B result in mid-process, function for executing processing for setting opening / closing timing based on second release timing table, number of hold information is not less than predetermined number A function for executing a process for setting the opening / closing timing based on the function, a function for executing a process for setting the opening / closing timing based on the operation status and gaming state of the distribution members 300, 310, the first opening / closing timing changing process, or the second opening / closing A function for performing opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that a V prize is likely to occur, such as a function for performing timing change processing);
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (open / close pattern B, C, normal open result, first open timing table selected) The number of hold information is less than the predetermined number, the grasping result of the operation status of the sorting members 300 and 310 is not the predetermined result, and the number of game times from the opening / closing execution mode exceeds the predetermined number, Conditions that make it difficult for V prizes to occur, such as the fact that the change lottery by the change lottery process was not won, that the V prize was not possible on the normal route after the temporary change, and that the V prize was originally possible only on the normal route were established. The second switching execution means (the setting process for each round by the main controller 81) that executes the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing, A function control start process for executing the process for the open / close patterns B and C in the setting process for opening, a function for executing the process for the normal opening result in the process during control, and the opening / closing timing are set based on the first opening timing table. Function for executing the process, function for executing the process for setting the opening / closing timing based on the fact that the number of the hold information is less than the predetermined number, and setting the opening / closing timing based on the operation status and gaming state of the distribution members 300 and 310 A function for executing the process to perform, a function for executing a process for adopting the temporarily set opening / closing timing as it is, a function for executing the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that V winning is difficult to occur),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a game ball can be received in the variable receiving means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and a privilege is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion, The distribution means is provided, and the mode is changed so that it is easy or difficult to pass through the first passage portion side at a predetermined timing. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, if the first condition is satisfied, state switching control that affects the acceptance to the variable receiving means is performed at the first timing, which is different from the first condition. When the two conditions are satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing in this way, without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side, it is possible to vary the easiness of passing / the difficulty (passing rate) to the first passage part side.

  In particular, when a game ball is received by the variable receiving means, an event in which the game ball does not pass through the first passing portion side by the distributing means occurs (occurs frequently), so it is difficult for the player. Not only can the benefits not be obtained and the interest in the game decline, but the player may also feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution means side is changed without changing the state switching timing, thereby changing the reception timing to the variable reception means, and then the first passing section. By adopting a configuration in which the passing rate to the side is changed, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

  In addition, as a timing for switching between the first mode and the second mode in the allocating means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

Feature A2. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A variable that is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first state. A ball entry means (the accessory device 150);
Variable entry for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (entrance to the operation ports 38, 39 or start of round game). Control means (function for executing opening / closing processing by the main control device 81 and function for executing game control processing);
A first passage part (V winning path 191a) and a second passage part (outgoing path 191b) through which the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing section, a privilege granting means (a function for executing the opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of the round game or occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode) to the player. And a function to execute a winning process)
A first mode in which game balls that have entered the variable pitching means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in an undistributed state, and the second distribution member 310 If the first distribution member 300, the second distribution member is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member is less distributed to the first passage portion side than the first aspect. 310 is a non-distributed state), and can be switched at a predetermined timing (sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201),
With
The variable entry control means includes
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (that is, the opening / closing pattern A, the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the second opening timing table is selected, That the number of the hold information is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, that the grasping result of the operation status of the sorting members 300 and 310 is the predetermined result, and that the number of game times from the opening / closing execution mode is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times, The first timing is based on the fact that the winning condition of the V winning is established, such as winning the changing lottery by the changing lottery process, or being able to win the V winning in the normal route even after the temporary change. The first switching execution means for executing the state switching control (the function for executing the processing for the opening / closing pattern A in the setting processing for each round by the main control device 81 and the setting processing for each opening, and the main control device A function for executing a process for the special opening A result and the special opening B result in the control start process and the process under control by 1, a function for executing a process for setting the opening / closing timing based on the second release timing table, and holding information A function for executing a process for setting the opening / closing timing based on the fact that the number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a function for executing a process for setting the opening / closing timing based on the operation status and gaming state of the sorting members 300 and 310, A function of executing opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that a V prize is easily generated, such as a function of executing the first opening / closing timing changing process or the second opening / closing timing changing process),
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (open / close patterns B and C, a normal release result, or the first release timing table is selected. That the number of hold information is less than the predetermined number, the grasping result of the operation status of the sorting members 300 and 310 is not the predetermined result, and the number of game times from the opening / closing execution mode is the predetermined number of times. V winnings have occurred, such as the fact that the winning lottery has not been won by the change lottery process, the V winning is not possible on the normal route after the temporary change, or the V winning is possible only on the normal route. Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (for each round by the main control device 81). A function for executing the processing for the open / close patterns B and C in the setting processing for each opening, a function for executing the processing for the normal opening result in the control start processing and the in-control processing by the main control device 81, A function for executing a process for setting the opening / closing timing based on one release timing table, a function for executing a process for setting the opening / closing timing based on the fact that the number of hold information is less than a predetermined number, An opening / closing accessory 168 so that a V prize is not easily generated, such as a function for executing a process for setting an opening / closing timing based on the operation status and gaming state of 310 and a function for executing a process for directly adopting the temporarily set opening / closing timing. Function to execute the opening and closing control of)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a game ball can enter the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and when the game ball passes through the first passing portion, a privilege is given. The means is provided with a distribution means, and the mode is changed so that it is easy or difficult to pass the first passage section side at a predetermined timing. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, if the first condition is satisfied, state switching control that influences the entry to the variable entry means is performed at the first timing. What is the first condition? When a different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing in this way, without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side, it is possible to vary the easiness of passing / the difficulty (passing rate) to the first passage part side.

  In particular, it is not easy for a player if an event occurs in which the game ball does not pass through the first passing portion side by the sorting means even though the game ball has entered the variable entry means. Not only can the benefits not be obtained and the interest in the game decline, but the player may also feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, with respect to the distribution timing on the distribution means side, without changing it, by changing the state switching timing, the entrance timing to the variable entry means is made different, and the first time thereafter. By adopting a configuration in which the passing rate to the passing portion side is changed, it is possible to avoid the above inconvenience.

  In addition, as a timing for switching between the first mode and the second mode in the allocating means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

Feature A3. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A variable that is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first state. A ball entry means (the accessory device 150);
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game), variable entry control means (open / close processing by the main control device 81) that executes state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable entry means Function to execute)
A first passage part (V winning path 191a) and a second passage part (outgoing path 191b) through which the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage part, a privilege granting means (a function for executing the opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of the round game) to the player;
A first mode in which game balls that have entered the variable pitching means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in an undistributed state, and the second distribution member 310 If the first distribution member 300, the second distribution member is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member is less distributed to the first passage portion side than the first aspect. 310 is a non-distributed state), and can be switched at a predetermined timing (sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201),
Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (determined as the continuation rate variation mode in the process of step S1204 by the main control device 81), the state switching control of the variable pitching means is performed a predetermined number of times. A game state transition means (function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a specific state that can be executed a number of times (opening and closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode);
With
The specific state is a configuration for performing the next state switching control based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first passage unit in the one state switching control,
The variable entry control means includes
When the predetermined event occurs, based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied (that is, the opening / closing pattern A), a first switching execution means (main switch) that executes the state switching control at the first timing in the specific state A function for executing the process for the opening / closing pattern A in the setting process for each round by the control device 81 and the setting process for each opening),
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first timing in the specific state based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (that is, opening and closing patterns B and C). Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a timing (function for executing processing for the opening and closing patterns B and C in each setting processing for each round by the main control device 81 and setting processing for each opening);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a game ball can enter the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and when the game ball passes through the first passing portion, a privilege is given. The means is provided with a distribution means, and the mode is changed so that it is easy or difficult to pass the first passage section side at a predetermined timing. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, if the first condition is satisfied, state switching control that influences the entry to the variable entry means is performed at the first timing. What is the first condition? When a different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing in this way, without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side, it is possible to vary the easiness of passing / the difficulty (passing rate) to the first passage part side.

  Further, the above configuration is a configuration in which the next state switching control is performed when the game ball passes through the first passing portion during the one state switching control in the specific state. In the specific state, the first passing portion is controlled. The player is very interested in whether or not the game ball passes through.

  In particular, it is not easy for a player if an event occurs in which the game ball does not pass through the first passing portion side by the sorting means even though the game ball has entered the variable entry means. Not only the next state switching control is not performed, but the interest in the game is lowered, and the player may be given an unfair feeling. Therefore, as described above, the allocation timing on the allocation means side is changed without changing the state switching timing, so that the timing of entering the variable entry means is made different, and the first pass thereafter. By adopting a configuration in which the passage rate to the section side is changed, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience as described above.

  In addition, as a timing for switching between the first mode and the second mode in the allocating means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

Feature A4. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A variable that is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first state. A ball entry means (the accessory device 150);
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (entrance to the operation ports 38, 39), variable entry control means (main control) that executes state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable entry means. A function of executing game control processing by the device 81),
A first passage part (V winning path 191a) and a second passage part (outgoing path 191b) through which the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing section, a privilege granting means (a function for executing a winning process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode) to the player;
A first mode in which game balls that have entered the variable pitching means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in an undistributed state, and the second distribution member 310 If the first distribution member 300, the second distribution member is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member is less distributed to the first passage portion side than the first aspect. 310 is a non-distributed state), and can be switched at a predetermined timing (sorting members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201),
The state switching control of the variable pitching means can be executed a predetermined number of times based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (determined that the result of the determination by the main control device 81 is not a disengagement result or a direct hit result). A game state transition means (a game control process by the main controller 81) that can be shifted to a specific state (a state in which a process during control is performed based on a normal release result, a special release A result, or a special release B result) Function)
With
The variable entry control means includes
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (the result is a special release A result or special release B result, the second release timing table is selected, the number of hold information is a predetermined number. That the above is the case, the grasping result of the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is a predetermined result, the number of game times from the opening / closing execution mode is less than the predetermined number, and the change by the change lottery process Based on the fact that a V-winning condition such as winning a lottery or being able to win a V-route on a normal route even after a temporary change has been established) at the first timing in the specific state First switching execution means for executing state switching control (function for executing processing for special opening A result and special opening B result in control start processing and in-control processing by main control device 81, and second opening timing A function for executing a process for setting the opening / closing timing based on the table, a function for executing a process for setting the opening / closing timing based on the fact that the number of the hold information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the operation of the sorting members 300 and 310 An opening / closing accessory 168 so that a V-winning is likely to occur, such as a function for executing a process for setting an opening / closing timing based on a situation or a game state, a function for executing a first opening / closing timing changing process or a second opening / closing timing changing process, etc. Function to execute the opening and closing control of)
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (the result is a normal release result, the first release timing table is selected, the number of hold information is predetermined) Less than the number, the result of grasping the operation status of the sorting members 300 and 310 is not a predetermined result, the number of game times from the opening / closing execution mode exceeds a predetermined number, or a change by a change lottery process Based on the fact that conditions for preventing V-winning were established, such as not winning the lottery, V-winning on the normal route after the temporary change, and V-winning only possible on the normal route originally) The state switching control is executed at a second timing different from the first timing without making the start timing of the specific state different from the case of the first switching execution means. Switching execution means (a function for executing a process for a normal release result in a control start process and a process under control by the main controller 81, a function for executing a process for setting an opening / closing timing based on the first release timing table, A function for executing a process for setting the opening / closing timing based on the fact that the number of information is less than a predetermined number, and a function for executing a process for setting the opening / closing timing based on the operation status and gaming state of the sorting members 300 and 310 And a function for executing opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that V winning is not likely to occur, such as a function for executing processing that adopts the temporarily set opening / closing timing as it is)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a game ball can enter the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and when the game ball passes through the first passing portion, a privilege is given. The means is provided with a distribution means, and the mode is changed so that it is easy or difficult to pass the first passage section side at a predetermined timing. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, if the first condition is satisfied, state switching control that influences the entry to the variable entry means is performed at the first timing. What is the first condition? When a different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing in this way, without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side, it is possible to vary the easiness of passing / the difficulty (passing rate) to the first passage part side.

  In particular, it is not easy for a player if an event occurs in which the game ball does not pass through the first passing portion side by the sorting means even though the game ball has entered the variable entry means. Not only will privileges not be granted but interest in the game will be reduced, it may also give the player an unfair feeling. Therefore, as described above, the allocation timing on the allocation means side is changed without changing the state switching timing, so that the timing of entering the variable entry means is made different, and the first pass thereafter. By adopting a configuration in which the passage rate to the section side is changed, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience as described above.

  Moreover, it will be in the specific state which can be entered into the variable entrance means when predetermined conditions are satisfied. And according to the said structure, the timing of state switching control can be varied without varying the start timing of a specific state. As a result, not only will the rate of entry into the variable entry means vary in the specific state, but if the timing of the state switching control is set in relation to the switching timing of the mode of the distribution means, While making it difficult to aim and shoot the passing of the game ball to the 1 passing portion, it is possible to vary the passing rate to the first passing portion side.

  In addition, as a timing for switching between the first mode and the second mode in the allocating means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

  Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is likely to pass through the first passage portion side than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, when the state switching control by the first switching execution unit is performed, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball is easier to pass through the first passing portion. Is easily given. Therefore, it is considered that the player is greatly interested in whether the first condition is satisfied or whether the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of the feature A3, when the first condition is satisfied because the passage of the game ball through the first passage portion in the specific state is a condition for shifting to the next state switching control. However, when the second condition is satisfied, it is difficult to shift to the next state switching control. Therefore, not only whether or not any condition is satisfied in each state switching control, but also the continuation rate of the state switching control can be changed, and a novel game can be achieved.

  In addition, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of the feature A4, it is possible to change the passing rate to the first passing portion without changing the start timing of the specific state, so it is possible to reduce the privilege while suppressing acts such as aiming. The grant rate (passage rate to the first passage part) can be changed, and a novel game can be achieved.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A variable receiving means (serving function) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Material device 150),
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of round game), variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (opening / closing processing by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
A first passage portion (V winning path 191a) and a second passage portion (outward passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing section, a privilege granting means (a function for executing the opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of the round game or occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode) to the player. )When,
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in an undistributed state, and the second distribution member 310 If there is a distribution state) and a second aspect that is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion than the first aspect (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 If not, the sorting means (sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
Specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ) Game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode) that can be executed over
With
In the special game state, in the one specific control, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage portion, it is possible to perform the next specific control,
The variable acceptance control means includes
During the specific control, the state switching control is performed at the first timing based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied (for example, the condition that makes it easy to generate a V prize such as the opening / closing pattern A is satisfied). First switching execution means to be executed (a timing at which V distribution by the main controller 81 is easily performed, such as a setting process for each round by the main controller 81 and a process for the opening / closing pattern A in each setting process for opening) A function of executing processing for opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168),
Based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied during the specific control (for example, a condition that makes it difficult to generate a V prize, such as opening / closing patterns B and C), is established. Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (for the opening / closing patterns B and C in the setting processing for each round and the setting processing for each opening by the main control device 81) A function of executing processing for opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that V distribution is difficult to be performed, such as processing)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a privilege is granted when a game ball received in a situation where the game ball can be received in the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion, the variable receiving means includes: The distribution means is provided, and the mode is changed in such a manner that it is easy or difficult to pass through the first passage part side at a predetermined timing. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is established, the specific control that can be executed over a plurality of times is shifted to a special gaming state that can be executed over a plurality of times. This special gaming state is configured such that the next specific control can be performed based on having passed through the first passage part in one specific control, and therefore, only by the number of receiving to the variable receiving means. However, the player's attention is drawn to whether or not the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passage portion.

  In such a configuration, during one specific control, when the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the first timing, and when the second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing. In the variable receiving means, the distribution mode on the distribution means side is a predetermined timing, and the distribution mode does not change, so the timing of the state switching control on the variable reception means side is changed as described above. Thus, it is possible to vary the easiness of passing to the first passing portion side / difficulty (passing rate) without changing the sorting mode on the sorting means side.

  As a result, the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state can be designed without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side, and the diversification of the game can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, as a timing for switching between the first mode and the second mode in the allocating means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball can easily pass through the first passage portion side than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, when the state switching control by the first switching execution means is performed, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion. It is easy to shift to the next specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player is greatly interested in whether the first condition is satisfied or whether the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature B3. The game according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, wherein, in the special game state, the switching timing of the distribution means is determined as a predetermined timing from the start of the one specific control. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, the switching timing between the first mode and the second mode is fixed from the start of one specific control, while the first condition is met or the second condition is met. Depending on whether or not the acceptance timing to the variable acceptance means is different, the passage rate to the first passage portion changes accordingly. Thereby, the continuation rate of specific control can be changed without changing the operation pattern of the distribution means.

  Feature B4. In each of the specific controls in the special gaming state, there is provided means for setting at the time of transition to the special gaming state whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state changes depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, which condition is satisfied depends on the special game state. Since it is set at the time of transition, for example, at the start of the special gaming state (at the time of transition), notification regarding the continuation rate (notification of a special gaming state with a high continuation rate or a specific state with a low continuation rate Notification etc.) can be executed. Therefore, attention can be paid to which condition is satisfied at the time of transition to the special game state, and interest in the game can be increased.

  Note that “at the time of transition to the special gaming state” can be rephrased as “based on the establishment of the predetermined condition”.

  Feature B5. Features B1 to B4 comprising means for setting at the start of the specific control whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in each specific control in the special gaming state The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state changes depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, which condition is satisfied is determined in the special game state. Since it is set at the start of the specific control, it is possible to always pay attention to which condition is satisfied in each specific control (whether the continuation rate is high or low).

  Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein a plurality of the allocating means are provided on a flow path of one gaming ball.

  According to the said structure, the passage rate to the 1st passage part after that changes with the combination of the 1st aspect in each distribution means, and a 2nd aspect. Since the execution timing of the state switching control is set to be different depending on which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the passing rate of the first passage unit can be set more variously. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

  Note that “provided separately from the allocating means and performing a periodic operation, the game balls received by the variable receiving means are transferred to either the first passage portion side or the second passage portion side. If a periodic operation means (rotating body 201) that can be derived is provided, each distribution means that switches between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing, and a periodic operation is performed. The distinction from the periodic operation means can be made clear.

  Feature B7. As each of the plurality of distribution means provided, the first distribution means (first distribution member 300, rotating body 201) visible from the front of the gaming machine and the visibility from the front of the gaming machine are the first. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, further comprising second distribution means (second distribution member 310) lower than the distribution means.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific control is continued when the game ball passes through the first passage portion in the special gaming state, if the distribution means for distributing the passage rate to the first passage portion can be visually recognized, It is preferable from the standpoint that the game of watching and enjoying the minutes can be performed and the degree of attention to the game is increased. On the other hand, if the allocating means is visible, there is a possibility that an act of aiming at the allocating of the allocating means is performed, and there is a problem that it is difficult to find an illegal act. Therefore, by providing a plurality of sorting means and providing a difference in the visibility, it is possible to solve the conflicting problems caused by the visibility.

  Feature B8. When the second distribution means is in the first mode, the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage than when the first distribution unit is in the first mode. The gaming machine according to Feature B7.

  According to the above-described configuration, since the possibility of passing through the first passing portion is higher when the sorting by the second sorting means on the low visibility side is performed, it is more preferable to suppress aiming. be able to. As mentioned above, even if it is a conflicting issue due to high or low visibility, if fraudulent acts are carried out, it is disadvantageous not only for game halls and game machine manufacturers, but also for players who play other legitimate games May give. For this reason, countermeasures against fraud are considered to be a top priority.

  Feature B9. When the game ball received by the variable receiving means reaches the distribution means, even if the distribution means is in the second mode, the game ball can be subsequently led to the first passage portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to leave the possibility of passing through the first passage section regardless of whether the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed by either the first switching execution means or the second switching execution means. By doing in this way, the continuation rate of the specific control is changed according to the timing of the state switching control, but the continuation rate is not determined only by that, and the state switching control in which the continuation rate becomes low is performed Even so, it is possible to prevent the interest in games from being extremely reduced.

  Feature B10. In the special gaming state, when a game ball passes through the first passing part during one of the specific controls, even if a period during which the specific control is performed remains, the configuration shifts to the next specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

  According to the above configuration, the number of game balls that can be received by the variable receiving means in the one specific control differs depending on the timing of passing through the first passage part during the one specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player is highly interested in when the game ball passes through the first passing portion, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  The “period during which the specific control is performed” can be described in more detail as “the number of times of state switching control in the specific control”.

Feature B11. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
In the one specific control, the first condition is set so as to be easily established at a timing later than the second condition. The gaming machine according to Feature B10,

  According to the above configuration, in the period in which one specific control is performed, the rear side becomes easier to control so that the game ball easily passes through the first passage part side. By doing so, the number of game balls received by the variable receiving means during one specific control is increased, and the period during which the game balls are interested in whether or not to pass through the first passage portion is lengthened. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

  Feature B12. Regardless of which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the period during which one state switching control is performed during the specific control is set to the same period. A gaming machine according to any one of B11.

  According to the above configuration, since the period required for each state switching control in the specific control is the same period while changing the passing rate of the first passing unit, that is, the continuation rate of the specific control, the fairness of the game is ensured. Is done. This is because if the period required for each state switching control is varied, not only the continuation rate of the specific control but also the number of game balls accepted by the variable receiving means is different.

Feature B13. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
In each of the specific controls in the special gaming state, comprising: setting means for setting whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the start of the specific control;
The setting means is characterized in that, in the state switching control at the first predetermined number of times in each of the specific controls, the first condition can be more easily established than the second condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12.

  According to the above configuration, in the first predetermined number of times of the specific control, the first condition is easily satisfied, so that the game ball can easily pass through the first passage portion. That is, the continuation rate of the first predetermined number of specific controls is high. Therefore, in the first predetermined number of times of specific control, it is possible to entertain the special gaming state with an elegant feeling that the specific control continues. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature B14. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
In each of the specific controls in the special gaming state, comprising: setting means for setting whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the start of the specific control;
The setting means is characterized in that the second condition can be more easily established than the first condition in the specific control at the second predetermined number of times in each of the specific controls. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B13.

  According to the above configuration, in the second predetermined number of specific controls, the second condition is easily satisfied, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the first passage portion. That is, the second predetermined number of specific controls have a low continuation rate. Therefore, in the second predetermined number of times of specific control, whether or not the specific control is continued, that is, whether or not the game ball passes through the first passage part, is paid attention to the whereabouts of the game ball, and the special game Can add inflection to the degree of attention in the state. Therefore, interest can be improved.

  In relation to the feature B13, the “second predetermined number” may be expressed as “a second predetermined number that is different from the first predetermined number”.

  Feature B15. In the feature B14, the setting unit can make the first condition easier to be satisfied than the second condition in the specific control next to the second predetermined number of times. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, if the continuation rate is continued at the second predetermined number of times, the continuation rate is set to be higher in the next specific control. No is an important factor, and the degree of attention to the second predetermined number of specific controls can be increased.

  Feature B16. The special game state transferred by the game state transfer means includes a first special game state (16R continuation mode) in which the first condition is more easily established than the second condition, and the second condition than the first condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, characterized in that a second special gaming state (continuous variation mode) in which a condition is easily established is provided.

  According to the above configuration, the continuation rate of the specific control in the special game state differs depending on which of the first special game state and the second special game state is to be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the type of special game state, and to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B17. The gaming state transition means is configured to be able to shift to the special gaming state based on the fact that the game ball accepted by the variable acceptance means has passed through the first passage portion.
A predetermined notification means (symbol display device) indicating whether to shift to the first special game state or the second special game state from when passing through the first passage part to at least the transition to the special game state 51) provided with a notification control means (function for executing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode based on a control end command from the main control device 81 by the effect control device 82),
The gaming machine according to Feature B16, wherein the predetermined notifying unit is provided in the vicinity of the variable receiving unit.

  According to the above configuration, before the transition to the special gaming state, the player pays attention to whether or not the variable receiving means accepts the game ball and whether or not the accepted game ball passes the first passing portion. After that, pay attention to which special gaming state to enter. And since the predetermined notification means is provided in the vicinity of the variable receiving means, even if such a target that the player pays attention to is different, the respective notifications are performed within the range that can be seen naturally. , It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being dispersed.

Note that “the predetermined notification means is in the vicinity of the variable receiving means” means, for example,
"The variable receiving means and the predetermined notification means are provided in a production unit having each, and the production unit is installed in a game area where a game ball flows down",
“A fixed unit for fixing the variable receiving means and the predetermined notifying means to a game board is provided, and the predetermined notifying means is fixed to an enclosure covering the variable receiving means in the fixed unit. It can also be expressed as a “configuration”.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Variable receiving means provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received than the first state ( An accessory device 150);
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (function for executing game control processing by the main control device 81);
A first passage part (V winning path 191a) and a second passage part (outward passage 191b) through which the game balls accepted by the variable acceptance means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion, a game state transition process (mainly an open / close execution mode) in which the game state can be shifted to a special game state (open / close execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A function of executing a game state transition process by the control device 81);
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in an undistributed state, and the second distribution member 310 If there is a distribution state) and a second aspect that is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion than the first aspect (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 If not, the sorting means (sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
The state switching of the variable receiving means is performed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (the ball has entered the operation ports 38, 39, the opening waiting time has ended, the variable display time has ended, etc.). Game state transition means (function for executing game control processing by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a specific state in which control can be executed a predetermined number of times (a state in which processing during control is performed based on a normal release result or the like) )When,
With
The variable acceptance control means includes
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state is determined at the first timing based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied (for example, a condition that makes it easy to generate a V prize such as a special opening result). First switching execution means for executing switching control (a function for executing processing for opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 168 at a timing at which V distribution is easily generated);
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (a condition that makes it difficult to generate a V prize such as a normal release result). Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing without making the condition fulfillment timing different from that by the first switching execution means (it is difficult to generate V distribution). A function of executing an opening / closing control process of the opening / closing accessory 168 at a timing)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the game ball is received by the variable receiving means and the game ball passes through the first passing portion, the variable receiving means is provided with the distributing means. Thus, the mode is changed in such a manner that it is easy or difficult to pass through the first passage section side at a predetermined timing. In such a gaming machine, the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, when the first condition is satisfied, the variable receiving means is accepted at the first timing. The state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. By doing in this way, without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side, it is possible to vary the easiness of passing / the difficulty (passing rate) to the first passage part side.

  In particular, when a game ball is received by the variable receiving means, an event that the game ball does not pass through the first passing portion side by the distributing means occurs (occurs frequently), it is very special for the player. Not only will the game be less interested in the game state, but it may also give the player an unfair feeling. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution means side is changed without changing the state switching timing, so that the reception timing to the variable reception means is changed, and the subsequent first passage section side is changed. The above-described inconvenience can be avoided by adopting a configuration that changes the passage rate to the.

  In addition, as a timing for switching between the first mode and the second mode in the allocating means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, when the state switching control by the first switching execution unit is performed, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball is easier to pass through the first passing portion. Is easily given. Therefore, it is considered that the player is greatly interested in whether the first condition is satisfied or whether the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, in the feature C1, since the passing rate to the first passing part can be changed without changing the timing of establishment of the predetermined condition, the rate of transition to the special gaming state (first step) while suppressing actions such as aiming. (Passing rate to 1 passage part) can be changed, and it can be set as a novel game.

  Feature C3. The distribution means is characterized in that the switching timing between the first mode and the second mode is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Or the gaming machine described in the feature C2.

  According to the above configuration, the distribution unit switches between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, it is easier to give the player a sense of fairness in the game compared to a configuration in which the distribution means switches at random timing. On the other hand, as described in the feature C1, the first switching execution unit and the second switching execution unit have different timings of the state switching control during the specific state. Therefore, while ensuring fairness of the game, it is possible to vary the passing rate to the first passing portion by performing the state switching control by each switching executing means.

  Feature C4. The first switching execution unit and the second switching execution unit execute the state switching control at the first timing and the second timing without changing the number of times the state switching control is performed in the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the timing can be varied.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to vary the passing rate to the first passage unit without varying the number of times that the state switching control in one specific state is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player has an unfair feeling due to an increase or decrease in the number of times of state switching control.

  Feature C5. The first switching execution means and the second switching execution means may be configured such that the first timing and the second timing are different without changing the length of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state in the one specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the execution timing of the state switching control can be varied depending on the timing.

  According to the above configuration, since the length of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state and the game ball can be received is the same, no matter which switching execution means performs the state switching control, the variable receiving means The acceptance rate (entrance rate) itself does not change. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be further secured.

  It is to be noted that the configuration includes “a means (payout device 96) that gives a player a privilege (award ball based on winning a prize to the accessory device 150) based on the fact that the game ball is received by the variable receiving means”. Then, the fairness due to the fact that the acceptance rate to the variable acceptance means does not change can be further increased. By the way, in view of the game nature of how to pass the game ball to the first passage part, the privilege given based on the fact that the game ball is received by the variable receiving means, the game is passed through the first passage part. It is preferable that it is a privilege different from the privilege (transition to a special game state) provided based on the passage of the ball.

Feature C6. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
When the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, the state switching control on the rear side is more easily performed by the first switching execution unit than the state switching control on the front side. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, the rear side state switching control has a higher passage rate to the first passage than the front side state switching control. Thereby, it is possible to entertain the specific state to the end, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature C7. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
In the one state switching control in the specific state, the state switching control between the long-term mode and the short-term mode is performed so that the length of the period during which the variable receiving unit is in the first state is relatively long or short. Is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the first switching execution unit is configured to easily select the state switching control that is the long-term mode.

  According to the above configuration, since the passage rate to the first passage portion is increased in the state switching control that becomes a long-term mode, the acceptance rate to the variable acceptance means and the passage rate to the first passage portion are linked. Therefore, the points to be noticed for the player are clarified, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature C8. The launching means launches a game ball at a predetermined firing cycle (0.6 sec),
The first switching execution means and the second switching execution means may be configured such that the first timing and the second timing are different without changing the length of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state in the one specific state. It is a configuration that can vary the execution timing of the state switching control depending on the timing,
When the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, in the state switching control that is the short period mode, the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state is shorter than the firing cycle. The gaming machine according to Feature C7, wherein the gaming machine is set.

  According to the above configuration, although the game switching ball cannot be expected in the state switching control in the short-term mode, the gaming ball reception can be expected to the maximum in the state switching control in the long-term mode. Therefore, the timing at which the player should pay attention becomes clearer, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature C9. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
When the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution unit and when the state switching control is performed by the second switching execution unit, the specific state is completed earlier by the first switching execution unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine can be set as described above.

  According to the above configuration, the specific state ends earlier when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means that increases the passing rate to the first passage unit. For example, the next specific state is refrained. In this case, it is possible to shift to the next specific state at an early stage, and when the passage to the first passing portion occurs, it is possible to shift to the special gaming state at an early stage after the end of the specific state. Therefore, while realizing smooth progress of the game, even if the passage to the first passage part does not occur, the feeling can be switched quickly without giving the player the time to be discouraged. Can be urged.

Feature C10. In the allocating means, the switching timing between the first mode and the second mode is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied,
One of the characteristics C1 to C9 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is established when the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state as the state switching control. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, the distribution means is switched at a predetermined timing after the variable receiving means starts switching from the second state to the first state. By doing in this way, the operation start timing of the variable receiving means and the operation start timing of the distribution means become constant, and the fairness of the game is further secured.

Feature C11. In the allocating means, the switching timing between the first mode and the second mode is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The game area is provided with a ball entry portion (operation ports 38, 39) into which a game ball can enter,
The predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of the entry to the entry part or the entry information based on the entry to the entry part being a predetermined determination target. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the specific state is started based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering part, or the specific state is started based on the fact that the ball entry information based on the ball entry is a predetermined determination target. Is done. Then, the distribution means is switched at a predetermined timing from the start of the specific state. By doing so, the timing at which the entrance to the entrance part or the entrance information is determined and the operation start timing of the allocating means are made constant, and the fairness of the game is further secured.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A variable receiving means (serving function) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Material device 150),
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of round game), variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (opening / closing processing by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
A specific passing portion (V winning path 191a) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ) Game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode) that can be executed over
With
In the special game state, in the one specific control, it is possible to perform the next specific control based on the fact that the continuous condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the specific passage unit. It is the composition which becomes
In the specific control, a high continuation specific control in which the ease of establishment of the continuation condition is relatively high and a low continuation specific control are set,
The period during which the state switching control of the specific control is performed is different from the first predetermined period in which the state switching control is performed at the first timing because the control timing of the state switching control is different. A second predetermined period during which the state switching control is performed at two timings,
In the predetermined specific control in the special gaming state, the next specific control is set as the high continuation specific control based on the continuation condition being satisfied in the first predetermined period, and the second predetermined period It is provided with setting means (function to execute the process of step S1408 by the main control device 81) capable of setting the next specific control as the low continuation specific control based on the establishment of the continuation condition. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the continuation rate of the next specific control differs depending on whether the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period or whether the continuation condition is satisfied in the second predetermined period. As a result, it is considered that the player is highly interested in the establishment timing of the continuation condition in the predetermined specific control. Such an effect can be realized only by changing the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased with a simple configuration.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein in the predetermined specific control, the first predetermined period is set to the rear side of the second predetermined period.

  According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period on the rear side in the specific control, the next specific control becomes the high continuation specific control, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, each specific control during the special game state can be enjoyed for a longer time, which is preferable for the player. Further, for example, in the specific control, it is possible to perform a game such as adjusting the timing of receiving the game ball to the variable receiving means so that the continuation condition is satisfied not during the second predetermined period but during the first predetermined period. Thus, it is possible to create a new game that adjusts the continuation condition establishment timing during the specific control.

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to Feature D2, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is likely to pass through the specific passage portion than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, since the state switching control is performed at a timing at which the rear side first predetermined period is likely to pass through the specific passage portion, the continuation condition is more easily satisfied during the rear first predetermined period. . Therefore, for example, during the second predetermined period in which the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied, a novel game is realized in which the passage to the specific passage is not desired, and the passage to the specific passage is waited for the first predetermined period thereafter. be able to.

  Feature D4. In either the first predetermined period or the second predetermined period, the length of the period in which the first state is set is set so that the game ball can be received by the variable receiving means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

  According to the above configuration, since the game ball is received by the variable receiving means during the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period in the specific control, it is possible to cause the significance of continuing to fire the game ball. Thereby, what is called stop hitting which stops discharge of a game ball can be controlled.

  Feature D5. Any of the features D1 to D3, wherein the length of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state is set longer in the second predetermined period than in the first predetermined period. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is meaningful to continue firing the game ball even during the second predetermined period in which the next specific control can be the low continuous specific control if the continuation condition is satisfied. For example, the number of times of specific control is limited in the special gaming state, and the next continuation rate is irrelevant in the upper limit number of times of specific control. Therefore, with the above-described configuration, it is possible to make the game desired with the intention of allowing the variable receiving means to accept the game ball even in the second predetermined period.

  Feature D6. In the special game state, when the number of times of the state switching control reaches a predetermined number of times (RC2 = 19) in one specific control, the special game state is not satisfied if the continuation condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D5, wherein the game ends.

  According to the above configuration, it is considered that the player tries to establish the continuation condition before the number of times of state switching control reaches a predetermined number. However, if the first predetermined period set for the high continuation specific control is set on the rear side of the specific control as in the feature D2, for example, it is considered that the continuation condition should be satisfied on the rear side as much as possible. . Therefore, to enjoy such a sense of balance that the special game state end condition (reach the predetermined number of times without the continuation condition being satisfied) and the continuation condition is to be satisfied during the first predetermined period. Can improve the interest of the game.

  Feature D7. In the special gaming state, when the number of acceptance to the variable acceptance means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9) in one specific control, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the special gaming state The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the gaming state ends.

  According to the above configuration, it is considered that the player tries to establish the continuation condition before the number of acceptance to the variable acceptance means reaches the predetermined number. However, if the first predetermined period set for the high continuation specific control is set on the rear side of the specific control as in the feature D2, for example, it is considered that the continuation condition should be satisfied on the rear side as much as possible. . Therefore, to enjoy such a balanced feeling that the special game state end condition (the continuation condition is not satisfied and the predetermined number is reached) and the continuation condition is satisfied during the first predetermined period. Can improve the interest of the game.

  Feature D8. Any of the features D1 to D7, wherein when the current specific control is set to the high continuation specific control, the setting means can easily set the next specific control to the high continuation specific control. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is established during the first predetermined period in the predetermined specific control during the special gaming state, the high continuation specific control is easily set from the next time. Therefore, the degree of attention in the predetermined specific control is further increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the predetermined specific control is the low continuation specific control.

  According to the above configuration, even in the low continuation specific control in which the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period, the next specific control is set to the high continuation specific control. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention even during the low continuation specific control in which the continuation condition is difficult to be established.

  Feature D10. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the specific control next to the predetermined specific control can be set to the predetermined specific control.

  According to the above configuration, predetermined specific control having different continuation conditions depending on the establishment timing can be continued. Therefore, high interest is given to each of the specific controls in the special gaming state (not to miss the establishment timing of the continuation condition). To be able to).

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Variable receiving means provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received than the first state ( An accessory device 150);
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (function for executing game control processing by the main control device 81);
A first passage part (V winning path 191a) and a second passage part (outward passage 191b) through which the game balls accepted by the variable acceptance means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage section, a privilege granting means (for example, a game by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (transition to the opening / closing execution mode, establishment of a continuation condition for the round) to the player. State transition process), and
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in an undistributed state, and the second distribution member 310 If there is a distribution state) and a second aspect that is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion than the first aspect (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 If not, the sorting means (sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
With
In the control mode of the state switching control of the variable acceptance control means,
The game ball received by the variable receiving means includes a first timing (a timing at which V distribution can be performed) at which the game ball easily reaches the distribution means in the situation where the distribution means is in the first mode. A first state switching control mode (opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 to make V distribution easy to perform), wherein the variable receiving means is in the first state;
The game ball received by the variable receiving means includes a second timing (a timing at which V sorting is difficult to be performed) that is difficult to reach the sorting means in a situation where the sorting means is in the first mode. A second state switching control mode in which the variable receiving means is in the first state (opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 168 so as to make it difficult to perform V distribution);
Is set,
When the variable acceptance control means executes the state switching control, the variable acceptance control means switches switching means (for example, each of the main control devices 81 to switch between the first state switching control mode and the second state switching control mode). The control timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, such as setting processing for rounds, setting processing for each opening / closing, and processing during control, is controlled so as to be an opening / closing mode at a timing when V distribution is easily performed and an opening / closing mode at a timing when it is not. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the above configuration, when the game balls received by the variable receiving means are distributed to the first passing section side as a result of the distribution by the distribution means whose distribution destination is changed at a predetermined timing, A privilege is given to the person. In such a configuration, the variable acceptance control means for performing state switching control of the variable acceptance means includes a first switching control mode capable of executing variable acceptance control including a first timing that easily passes through the first passage section side, Since there is a switching means capable of switching between the second variable acceptance control mode including the second timing that is difficult to pass through the first passage section side, the distribution means side that operates at a predetermined timing is provided. Without changing the distribution mode, it is possible to vary the easiness of passing to the first passing portion / difficulty (passing rate). Therefore, interest can be improved while ensuring the fairness of the game.

  Feature E2. The first timing is set so as to include a timing at which it is difficult for the game ball received by the variable receiving means at the first timing to pass through the first passage portion. A gaming machine according to E1.

  According to the above configuration, even if the distribution means accepts the variable receiving means at the first timing, it is not necessarily distributed to the first passage section side, so it is safe even at the first timing. Without letting go, the interest in the destination of the accepted game ball will not fade. Therefore, the interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

  Feature E3. The gaming machine according to Feature E1 or Feature E2, wherein the second timing is set to a timing at which a game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass through the first passing portion.

  According to the above configuration, even if the distribution means accepts the variable acceptance means at the second timing, the possibility of passing through the first passage portion remains, and the player is not discouraged and the interest in the game is extremely high. Can be suppressed.

  Feature E4. The first state switching control mode is configured by a plurality of state switching controls, and the state switching control is one of the plurality of state switching controls, and the distribution means is the first mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is set as the state switching control at a first timing at which the distribution means is easily reached in a certain situation.

  According to the above configuration, for example, at least one state switching control is not a state switching control but another state switching control even when there is a situation that must be executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, if the state switching control is performed at the first timing at which it is easy to reach the first passage portion side, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be exhibited in consideration of the above situation.

  Feature E5. The state switching control that is different from the state switching control at the first timing among the state switching controls of the plurality of times is performed before the state switching control at the first timing. The gaming machine according to Feature E4, wherein a one-state switching control mode is set.

  According to the above configuration, since the state switching control on the side that is not the state switching control at the first timing is performed first, at that timing, the player determines whether or not it is the first state switching control mode. I can't. By doing so, it is possible to increase interest in each state switching control mode and immerse yourself in the game.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the distribution means is configured to be able to be switched at the predetermined timing from the timing at which the different state switching control is performed.

  According to the above configuration, the distribution timing of the distribution unit can be defined regardless of the first timing. In other words, since the distribution timing of the distribution means can be set in accordance with the state switching control on the side different from the first timing, for example, one state switching control is in accordance with the rules of the gaming machine. By changing the state switching control other than (state switching control at the first timing), the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be obtained.

  Feature E7. The second state switching control mode is configured by a plurality of times of the state switching control, and the state switching control is one of the plurality of times of the state switching control. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the gaming machine is set as the state switching control at a second timing at which it is difficult to reach the distribution means in a situation of

  According to the above configuration, for example, at least one state switching control is not a state switching control but another state switching control even when there is a situation that must be executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, if the state switching control is performed at the second timing at which it is difficult to reach the first passage portion side, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be exhibited in consideration of the above situation.

  If the configuration is applied to a gaming machine having the feature E4, both state switching control modes become a plurality of state switching controls, and it is possible to increase the effect of obscure any switching control mode to the player. .

  Feature E8. Of the multiple times of the state switching control, the state switching control different from the state switching control at the second timing is performed before the state switching control at the second timing. The gaming machine according to Feature E7, wherein a two-state switching control mode is set.

  According to the above configuration, since the state switching control on the side that is not the state switching control at the second timing is performed first, at that timing, the player determines whether it is the second state switching control mode. I can't. By doing so, it is possible to increase interest in each state switching control mode and immerse yourself in the game.

  Feature E9. The gaming machine according to Feature E8, wherein the distribution unit is configured to be able to be switched at the predetermined timing from the timing at which the different state switching control is performed.

  According to the above configuration, the distribution timing of the distribution unit can be defined regardless of the second timing. That is, since the distribution timing of the distribution means can be set in accordance with the state switching control on the side different from the second timing, for example, one state switching control is set according to the rules of the gaming machine. By changing the state switching control other than (the state switching control at the second timing), the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be obtained.

Feature E10. The first state switching control mode is configured by a plurality of state switching controls, and the state switching control is one of the plurality of state switching controls, and the distribution means is the first mode. It is set as the state switching control that is the first timing at which it is easy to reach the distribution means in a certain situation,
The second state switching control mode is configured by a plurality of times of the state switching control, and the state switching control is one of the plurality of times of the state switching control. Is set as the state switching control which is the second timing that is difficult to reach the distribution means in the situation of,
The state switching control different from the state switching control at the first timing and the state switching control different from the state switching control at the second timing are set to be executed at the same timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, for example, at least one state switching control is not a state switching control but another state switching control even when there is a situation that must be executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, if the state switching control is performed at the first timing that is easy to reach the first passage portion side or the second timing that is difficult to reach, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 is exhibited based on the above situation. can do. If the state switching control on the side different from the first timing and the second timing is executed at the same timing, it is possible to enhance the effect of making it difficult for the player to understand which switching control mode.

Feature E11. The state switching control that is different from the state switching control at the first timing among the state switching controls of the plurality of times is performed before the state switching control at the first timing. 1 state switching control mode is set,
Of the multiple times of the state switching control, the state switching control different from the state switching control at the second timing is performed before the state switching control at the second timing. Two-state switching control mode is set,
The gaming machine according to Feature E10, wherein the allocating means is configured to be able to be switched at the predetermined timing from the timing at which the different state switching control is performed.

  According to the above configuration, the switching timing of the allocating means can be set in accordance with the timing when the state switching control on the side different from the first timing and the second timing is performed. As in the feature E10, it is difficult for the player to know which switching control mode, and the state switching control on the different side is ahead of the state switching control at the first timing and the second timing. The effect of making it difficult to understand is also enhanced. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming at the first state switching control mode.

Feature E12. The variable acceptance control means performs a plurality of specific controls (round games) in which the state switching control of the variable acceptance means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) based on a predetermined condition being satisfied. Game state transition means (game state transition processing by the main controller 81) that can be shifted to a special game state (open / close execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode) that can be executed over 16 times (for example, 16 times RC1) Function)
In the special game state, in the one specific control, the next specific control can be performed based on a game ball passing through the first passage unit. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E11.

  According to the above configuration, the present invention can be applied to the control mode of the variable acceptance control during the special gaming state, and the excellent effect of the feature E1 can be achieved.

Feature E13. The privilege granting unit is configured to be able to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state as the privilege,
The variable acceptance control means is based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (the entry into the operation ports 38, 39 has occurred, the opening standby time has ended, the variable display time has ended, etc.) A game state transition means (by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a specific state in which the state switching control of the variable acceptance means can be executed a predetermined number of times (a state in which a process during control is performed based on a normal release result or the like). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, wherein the gaming machine has a function of executing a game control process.

  According to the above configuration, the present invention can be applied particularly to the control mode of the variable reception control during the normal gaming state, and the excellent effect of the feature E1 can be achieved.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry portion (first operation port 38, second operation port 39) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the pitching section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a specific number being a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Transition determination means for sequentially executing a transition determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (a function for executing a determination process by the main control device 81) )When,
In a gaming machine comprising
The game area includes
A specific passage portion (V prize opening 182a) through which game balls can pass;
A first mode (open state or distribution state) that is provided on the upstream side of the specific passing part and that easily leads the game ball to the specific passing part, and that the game ball is led to the specific passing part than the first mode. A sorting means (opening / closing tool 168, first sorting member 300, 310) capable of switching to a difficult second mode (closed state or non-sorted state);
Is provided,
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific passing portion, a gaming state transition means (a function for executing a gaming state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of shifting the gaming state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player )When,
Variable distribution control means (function for executing game control processing by the main control device 81) for executing aspect switching control between the first aspect and the second aspect of the distribution means;
With
The variable distribution control means includes
When the transition determination is performed by the transition determination unit, the mode switching control is executed at the first timing based on the number of the special information stored in the information storage unit being a first predetermined number. First switching execution means (for example, a function of executing game control processing by the main control device 81 when the common pending number CRN is 0);
When the shift determination unit performs the shift determination, the number of the special information stored in the information storage unit is a second predetermined number different from the first predetermined number. Second switching execution means for executing the mode switching control at a second timing different from one timing (for example, a function of executing a game control process by the main controller 81 when the common pending number CRN is 3);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the special information is acquired based on the entrance to the entrance part, the special information is stored in the information storage means up to a specific number, and the stored special information is sequentially determined for transition. In the target gaming machine, a specific passing portion is provided in the gaming area, and a distribution means is provided on the upstream side of the specific passing portion. It is performed at different timings depending on the number of stored special information. As a result, the number of special information stored and the passage rate to the specific passage unit can be associated. For example, if the number of special information stored is large, the mode switching control is performed at a timing at which it is easy to pass to the specific passage unit. A novel game in which the mode switching control is performed at a timing at which it is easy to pass to the specific passage if the number of stored special information is small, or the transition rate to the advantageous state is changed in relation to the stored number can do.

  Here, for example, as a configuration for changing the rate of transition to the advantageous state in relation to the number of memories, assuming that it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is to be transferred via a lottery based on numerical information, the lottery probability Can be made different depending on the number of memories. However, with such a configuration, the transition to the advantageous state is determined only by exchanging numerical information, not only deviating from the gaming machine's original pleasure of enjoying the flow-down mode of gaming balls, but only numerical information The possibility of fraudulent acts taking advantage of the gameability that progresses through the exchanges increases. Therefore, as in the above configuration, in a configuration in which the game ball shifts to an advantageous state when it passes through the specific passage portion, the mode switching control of the sorting means upstream of the specific passage portion is performed with the number of stored special information. By associating, it is possible to make it difficult for cheating to be performed while enjoying the flow-down mode of the game ball. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be suitably increased.

Feature F2. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball can easily pass through the specific passage portion than the second timing,
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the first predetermined number is set to be larger than the second predetermined number.

  According to the above configuration, the mode switching control is executed at a timing at which it passes through the specific passage portion as the number of special information stored in the information storage unit increases. Thereby, it is possible to create a new game that expects a lot of special information to be stored in the information storage means, and to improve the interest.

  Feature F3. The game state is set to a predetermined state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the transition determination by the transition determination unit is not performed even if the special information is stored in the information storage unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine having the feature F2, the transition determination is not performed in a predetermined state, so that the special information is easily stored. Thereby, it is possible to create a game such as how to store special information during the predetermined state.

  Note that the predetermined state can also be expressed as a state in which “the acquisition of the special information by the information acquisition unit is performed, but the shift determination by the shift determination unit is not performed”.

  Feature F4. The gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein the predetermined state is the advantageous state.

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the specific passing portion and shifts to the advantageous state, the shift determination for the special information is not performed, and as a result, the special information is easily stored during the advantageous state. For example, when the end condition of the advantageous state is established and ends, and the transition determination for the stored special information is performed, the mode switching control is performed at a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the specific passing portion as described above. . As a result, the advantageous state is extended. In this way, the player understands the appearance of the game state and the mode switching control of the distribution means instead of realizing the change of the transition probability to the advantageous state and the extended state of the advantageous state by lottery using numerical information. By realizing as much as possible, it becomes possible to create a new game in which the fairness of the game is ensured.

Feature F5. As the distribution means,
A first sorting means (opening / closing accessory 168) in which the mode switching control is executed by the first switching execution means or the second switching execution means according to the number of the special information stored in the information storage means; ,
Regardless of the number of the special information stored in the information storage unit, the second distribution unit (the rotating body 201, the first distribution member 300, the first distribution unit) in which the mode switching control is executed at a predetermined timing. 2 sorting members 310),
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the first allocating means whose timing switching control timing is different depending on the number of stored special information and the second allocating means that is not different are provided, and the irrelevant to the number of special information Since the first distribution means is provided, it is easy to give the player a sense of fairness.

  Feature F6. The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein the first distribution means is arranged on the upstream side of the flow path to the specific passage portion than the second distribution means.

  According to the above configuration, the timing at which the mode switching control of the first distribution means upstream of the second distribution means is performed in accordance with the number of special information, so that the timing is determined in advance. With respect to the second distribution means for which the mode switching control is performed, it is possible to vary the distribution ratio to the specific passage portion by setting on the first distribution means side. Therefore, the effect of the feature F5 can be achieved more suitably.

Feature F7. The game area is provided with a predetermined receiving device (a combination device 150) capable of receiving a game ball,
The specific passage portion is disposed at a position where a game ball accepted by the predetermined receiving device can pass,
The first distribution means is provided at a position where it is difficult to distribute the game balls received in the predetermined receiving device, while the second distribution means is received in the predetermined receiving device. The game machine according to Feature F5 or F6, wherein the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can be distributed.

  According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the game balls received in the receiving device are distributed to the specific passage unit side by the second distribution unit. For example, when a game ball received in the receiving device is distributed to a side different from the specific passing portion by the first distribution means, the player has performed some operation on the game hall or the gaming machine side. Then you may have distrust. On the other hand, with the above configuration, the game balls received in the receiving device are distributed by the second distribution unit that operates at a fixed timing without involving the first distribution unit. It is easy to feel fairness.

  Feature F8. The first distribution means becomes an aspect capable of receiving a game ball in the predetermined receiving device by becoming the first aspect, and the game ball is placed in the predetermined receiving apparatus by becoming the second aspect. The gaming machine according to Feature F7, wherein it is difficult to accept.

  According to the said structure, a 1st distribution means and a 2nd distribution means can be suitably arrange | positioned in relation to a predetermined | prescribed receiving apparatus. Further, even if the game balls are received by the predetermined receiving device, since the distribution by the second distribution means is performed, not all of them pass through the specific passing portion. Therefore, even if the timing of the mode switching control by the first distribution means is changed to change the acceptance rate to the predetermined receiving device, it is difficult to directly understand that the passage rate of the specific passage part changes. By doing in this way, in the structure which changes the passage rate of a specific passage part, it can make it hard to give an unfair feeling to a player.

Feature F9. The first switching execution means controls the period in which the state of the first distribution means to be in the first mode is maintained as the first period,
The second switching execution unit controls the first distribution unit so that a period during which the state of the first mode is maintained is the first period. F8 Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, even if the mode switching control is performed by the first switching execution unit or the mode switching control is performed by the second switching execution unit, the acceptance rate to the predetermined receiving device. Does not change. Therefore, it is difficult to give an unfair feeling to the game.

  It should be noted that if the configuration is provided with “privilege grant means (payout device 96) capable of granting a privilege (prize ball) to a player based on a game ball being received by a predetermined receiving device” The effect of not changing the rate can be exhibited more specifically.

Feature F10. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball can easily pass through the specific passage portion than the second timing,
The first predetermined number is set as a number greater than the second predetermined number;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the first timing is set to be a timing closer to a timing at which the transition determination is performed than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the greater the number of special information stored in the information storage unit, the easier the passage through the specific passage unit, the more the number of special information, the faster the mode switching control is executed. Therefore, a smooth and quick game can be realized while realizing a game in which the number of special information is increased to facilitate passage through the specific passage portion.

  Feature F11. The variable distribution control means can execute the mode switching control based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information corresponds to the transition information. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the special information acquired based on the entrance to the entrance part is the target of the transition determination, and the determination result of the transition determination corresponds to the transition information. Based on this, the mode switching control of the distribution means by the variable distribution control means is executed. And it will be determined whether it becomes easy to pass a specific passage part by this mode switching control. In such a game machine, by applying a characteristic configuration of change in aspect switching control according to the number of special information stored in the feature F1 described above, in a game starting from entering the entrance, The entrance rate to the ball part itself will be the most important, and it is possible to create innovative gameplay while emphasizing the fun inherent in gaming machines such as entering a game ball into a predetermined entrance part. . Therefore, interest can be improved.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A variable receiving means (serving function) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Material device 150),
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of round game), variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (opening / closing processing by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
A first passage portion (V winning path 191a) and a second passage portion (outward passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing section, first privilege granting means (opening / closing process by the main control device 81) that gives the player a first privilege (continuation of round game or occurrence of opening / closing execution mode). Function to execute)
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in an undistributed state, and the second distribution member 310 If there is a distribution state) and a second aspect that is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion than the first aspect (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 If not, the sorting means (sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, as the first privilege, specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) can be executed. A gaming state transition means (a function for executing a gaming state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode);
In the special game state, in one specific control, grasping means for grasping that the game ball has passed through the first passage part (function to execute the processes of steps S1329 and S1330 by the main control device 81);
With
The variable acceptance control means includes
During the specific control, the state switching control is performed at the first timing based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied (for example, the condition that makes it easy to generate a V prize such as the opening / closing pattern A is satisfied). First switching execution means to be executed (a timing at which V distribution by the main controller 81 is easily performed, such as a setting process for each round by the main controller 81 and a process for the opening / closing pattern A in each setting process for opening) A function for executing a process for controlling the opening / closing of the opening / closing accessory 168),
Based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied during the specific control (for example, a condition that makes it difficult to generate a V prize, such as opening / closing patterns B and C), is established. Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (for the opening / closing patterns B and C in the setting processing for each round and the setting processing for each opening by the main control device 81) A function of executing processing for opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that V distribution is difficult to be performed, such as processing)
With
According to the grasping result of the grasping means, second privilege granting means (step S1408 by the main control device 81) capable of giving the second privilege (each distribution table in FIG. 35, the display mode in FIG. 41B). And a function for executing the process of step SB105 by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball received by the variable receiving means in the normal game state passes through the first passage portion, the game ball shifts to the special game state as the first privilege. In this special game state, the control timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means is different between the case of the first switching execution means and the case of the second switching execution means. As a result, the passage to the first passage section is different. The rate will change. In this case, since the distribution means changes its mode at a predetermined timing, the distrust or unfairness given to the player even if the passing rate to the first passing part is different as described above. Can be reduced.

  Furthermore, it is grasped | ascertained by the grasping | ascertainment means in the special game state by having passed the 1st passage part, and a 2nd privilege can be provided based on the grasping result. Therefore, it is considered that the player wants the control to be performed by the first switching execution means so as to pass through the first passing portion during the special gaming state so that the second privilege is granted. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

  Feature G2. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is likely to pass through the first passage portion side than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, when the state switching control by the first switching execution means is performed, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion. It is easy to shift to the next specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player is greatly interested in whether the first condition is satisfied or whether the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G3. There are a high advantageous mode (open / close pattern of pattern A, relief mode or special mode) and a low advantageous mode (open / close pattern of patterns B and C, or normal mode) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high or low. Is set,
The second privilege is set as the high advantageous mode or the low advantageous mode,
The second privilege granting unit is configured to set either the high advantageous mode or the low advantageous mode based on the grasping result of the grasping unit. The feature G1 or the feature G2 The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the said structure, according to the passage condition to a 1st passage part during a special game state, it sets to a high advantageous mode or a low advantageous mode. As a player, of course, he / she thinks that he / she wants to be set to an advantageous high-advantage mode, so naturally he / she is highly interested in the situation of passage to the first passage section. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  Feature G4. The second privilege granting unit gives the second privilege based on the number of times of passage to the first passage section or the passage timing as a grasping result by the grasping unit. Game machines.

  According to the said structure, a high interest can be given to the passage condition to a 1st passage part more.

Feature G5. As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state (2R continuous mode opening / closing execution mode) in which the number of times that the specific control can be continued is set as a first number (for example, two times), and a number greater than the first number And a second special gaming state (16R continuous mode or continuous change mode open / close execution mode) set as the second number of times (for example, 16 times),
In each of the special game states, setting means for setting which of the first switching execution means and the second switching execution means executes the specific control (function to execute the process of step S1408 by the main control device 81) )
The setting means is easy to set by the first switching execution means in the specific control in the first special gaming state, and easily set by the second switching execution means in the specific control in the second special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, each special game state having a different number of continuation times of specific control is set as the special game state, and the first special game state having a low number of continuation times has a high passing rate to the first passage part. One switching execution means is likely to be set, and in the second special game state in which the number of continuations is greater than that, the second switching execution means having a low passage rate to the first passing portion is likely to be set. And the passage to the 1st passage part in a special game state is grasped by grasping means, and the 2nd privilege is given based on the result. By doing in this way, the advantage / disadvantage relationship of a special game state and the provision of the 2nd privilege by a 2nd privilege provision means can be linked | related, and diversification of a game can be aimed at. Therefore, it can be used to improve interest.

Feature G6. There are a high advantageous mode (open / close pattern of pattern A, relief mode or special mode) and a low advantageous mode (open / close pattern of patterns B and C, or normal mode) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high or low. Is set,
The second privilege is set as the high advantageous mode or the low advantageous mode,
The second privilege granting means is:
As the grasping result of the grasping means, based on the first grasping result that the number of times that the game ball has passed through the first passage part is less than the specific number of times or that the passage timing is earlier than the specific passage timing. Set to the high advantageous mode,
As the grasping result of the grasping means, the low number of times based on the second grasping result that the number of times that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion is the specified number of times or more or that the passing timing is after the specified passing timing. The gaming machine according to Feature G5, wherein the gaming machine is set to an advantageous mode.

  According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of feature G5, since the number of times of specific control is small in the first special gaming state, it is easy to pass to the first passing portion, while the number of passing times and the passing timing are the It can be faster than the state. Therefore, in such a case, if the configuration is set to the high advantage mode having a high advantage for the player, the advantage of the first special game state that easily passes through the first passage portion can be made more conspicuous. Is possible. As a result, the interest can be improved.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to Feature G6, wherein the high advantageous mode or the low advantageous mode is set at the end of the special gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, the high advantageous mode is easily set after the first special gaming state, and the low advantageous mode is easily set after the second special gaming state. In the first special game state, the passage rate of the first passage portion is higher than that in the second special game state, but the number of specific controls is smaller than that in the second special game state. Therefore, if the balance of the advantages of the first special game state and the second special game state is configured as described above, even in the first special game state that tends to memorize a disadvantageous feeling for the player, it is advantageous thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play.

  Feature G8. The gaming machine according to Feature G7, wherein the high advantageous mode and the low advantageous mode are set so that the predetermined condition is more easily established in the high advantageous mode.

  According to the above configuration, after the first special gaming state, the predetermined condition is satisfied again and it becomes easy to shift to the special gaming state. In this way, even in the first special game state where the number of specific controls is small, it is considered that the player is satisfied and continues the game. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Feature G9. When the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, the timing at which the game ball received by the variable receiving means easily reaches the sorting means in the situation where the sorting means is in the first mode ( The variable receiving means is in the first state at the first timing including the timing at which V distribution can be performed)
When the state switching control is performed by the second switching execution unit, the timing at which the game ball received by the variable receiving unit hardly reaches the distribution unit in the situation where the distribution unit is in the first mode ( The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G8, wherein the variable receiving means is brought into the first state at the second timing including a timing at which V distribution is difficult to be performed.

  According to the above configuration, the difference in the degree of advantage between the high advantageous mode and the low advantageous mode (special game state) with a simple configuration in which the timing of each state switching control by the first switching execution means and the second switching execution means is different. Transition rate). Here, a configuration in which the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the special gaming state is changed (the probability of establishment of the predetermined condition is changed) is also conceivable. However, in this case, various inconveniences such as a complicated processing configuration inside the gaming machine and a decrease in understanding level of the player may occur. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the transition rate of such a special gaming state is changed by a simple configuration in which the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means as described above is changed and the timing of the distributing means is not changed. The game can be diversified while avoiding the above-described inconveniences.

Feature G10. A ball entry portion (first operation port 38, second operation port 39) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the pitching section;
A transition determination means (a function for executing a determination process by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined transition information; ,
Based on the fact that the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means, a predetermined effect is started by a predetermined notification means, and the predetermined effect is ended as a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination. As one game time, notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (function to execute the effect processing by the effect control device 82),
Period setting means (a function for executing the setting process of the variable display time by the main control device 81) for setting the effect period of the game times;
With
The variable acceptance means executes the state switching control based on the notification by the notification control means as a result of the transition determination by the transition determination means corresponding to the transition information as the predetermined event. And
The allocating means is configured to switch to the first mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on the special information being subject to the transition determination.
There are a high advantageous mode (open / close pattern of pattern A, relief mode or special mode) and a low advantageous mode (open / close pattern of patterns B and C, or normal mode) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high or low. Is set,
The second privilege is set as the high advantageous mode or the low advantageous mode,
In the high advantageous mode, the period setting unit is configured to allow the game ball received by the variable receiving unit to easily reach the distribution unit in a situation where the distribution unit is in the first mode (V distribution is The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G9, characterized in that the production period can be set so as to be a timing that can be performed.

  According to the above configuration, the transition determination is performed based on the entrance to the entrance part, and if the result of the transition determination corresponds to the transition information, the variable receiving means is in the first state after the game is played. In this case, in the high advantageous mode, in order to set the game period effect period so that it is easy to be distributed to the first passing part side when the switching of the distribution means occurs, after passing the first passing part, Transition to the special game state. In this way, even in the first special game state where the number of specific controls is small, it is configured so as to be so-called, and it is very simple such as changing the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means. By realizing with the configuration, a novel game can be realized.

<Characteristic H group>
Feature H1. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A variable receiving means (serving function) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Material device 150),
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of round game), variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (opening / closing processing by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
A specific passing portion (V winning path 191a) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ) Game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode) that can be executed over
With
In the specific control, a high advantageous control mode and a low advantageous control mode having different timings of the state switching control are set so that the level of advantage for the player is relatively high and low.
In the special gaming state, setting means for setting which of the high-advantage control mode and the low-advantage control mode is to be executed as the control mode of each specific control (executes setting processing for each round by the main control device 81) Function)
In a predetermined specific control in the special gaming state, switching means for generating a switch from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode (function for executing setting processing for each opening by the main control device 81),
In the predetermined specific control, special notification executing means (a function for executing an opening handling process by the effect control device 82) for executing special notification by predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 51);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, during the special gaming state, the special notification is performed at a timing when the control mode of the variable receiving means is different. That is, the special notification is performed at the timing (predetermined specific control) when the low-control control mode having a low advantage for the player is switched to the high-advantage control mode having a high advantage as the control mode. In this way, when the player shifts to the special gaming state, the player is greatly delighted as having switched from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

Feature H2. In the special game state, in the one specific control, it is possible to perform the next specific control based on the fact that the continuous condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the specific passage unit. It is the composition which becomes
The low-advantageous control mode and the high-advantageous control mode are different in the state switching control mode of the variable receiving means, thereby changing the establishment rate of the continuation condition, and setting the level of the level of advantage. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, the low advantageous control mode and the high advantageous control mode are realized by the level of the continuation rate of the specific control during the special gaming state, and the level of the continuation rate is determined by the state switching control of the variable receiving means. This is realized by the aspect. In this way, while maintaining the enjoyment inherent in the gaming machine, such as enjoying the operation mode of the gaming ball, such as whether or not the gaming ball is received by the variable receiving means and whether or not it passes through the specific passing portion. The game can be diversified so that a special notification is also expected from a predetermined notification means.

  Feature H3. In the special gaming state, the first special gaming state in which the switching from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode can occur in the predetermined specific control, and the switching occurs in the predetermined specific control. The gaming machine according to Feature H1 or Feature H2, wherein a second special gaming state that is not set is set.

  According to the above configuration, the player is highly interested in whether the generated special gaming state is the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state, and further, it is switched to the first special gaming state (high advantageous control mode). I expect it to be a substitute). As a result, it is considered that the degree of attention to the predetermined specific control is increased and the interest in the special notification is also increased. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H4. In the first special gaming state, state switching control of each specific control is performed in the low advantageous control mode in the specific control before the predetermined specific control from the start of the first special game state,
In the second special gaming state, in the specific control before the predetermined specific control from the start of the second special gaming state, state switching control of each specific control is performed in the low advantageous control mode. The gaming machine described in the characteristic H3.

  According to the above configuration, it cannot be identified from the control mode of the variable receiving means from the start of the special gaming state whether the state is the first or second special gaming state. Therefore, the expectation to the special notification at the time of predetermined specific control is enhanced.

  Feature H5. The gaming machine according to claim H4, wherein the special gaming state is set as having a higher probability that the second special gaming state is selected than the first special gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, even if the player shifts to the special game state, the player may be in the second special game state and the degree of attention may decrease. At such a timing, it is possible to suitably realize the surprise and joy of the player by executing the special notification and performing the effect of switching to the highly advantageous control mode (actually the first special gaming state). It becomes possible.

  Feature H6. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the switching means is performed at a specific number of times of each state switching control (RC2 = 11) in the predetermined specific control.

  According to the above configuration, switching from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode occurs during the specific control (the specific number of times of the state switching control performed a plurality of times). By doing in this way, it can be expected that the above-mentioned switching occurs for each specific control performed a plurality of times in the special gaming state, and it becomes possible to increase interest in each specific control. .

  Feature H7. The specific control includes a first specific control (pattern F) in which switching from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode can occur, and a second specific control (pattern C) in which the switching does not occur. , Is set, The gaming machine according to Feature H6.

  According to the above configuration, the player is highly interested in whether each specific control in the special gaming state is the first specific control or the second specific control, and further switches to the first specific control (highly advantageous control mode). Expect things). As a result, it is considered that the degree of attention to the predetermined specific control is increased and the interest in the special notification is also increased. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H8. In the first specific control, each state switching control is performed in the low advantageous control mode in the state switching control before the specific number of times of the state switching control from the start of the first specific control.
In the second specific control, each state switching control is performed in the low advantageous control mode in the state switching control of the specific number of times from the start of the second specific control. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, it cannot be identified from the control mode of the variable receiving means from the start of each specific control in the special gaming state which of the first and second specific controls. Therefore, the expectation to the special notification for the specific number of times is enhanced.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A first swing that can be switched at a predetermined timing between a first mode in which game balls flowing down the game area are distributed in a first direction and a second mode in which the game balls are distributed in a second direction different from the first direction. Distribution means (rotating body 201, first distribution member 300, second distribution member 310);
Second distribution means (open / close accessory) that can be switched between a third mode in which game balls flowing down the game area are distributed in a third direction and a fourth mode in which the game balls are distributed in a fourth direction different from the third direction. 168),
Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, grasping means for grasping which of the first aspect and the second aspect the first distribution means (the processing of step S2105 by the main control device 81 is performed). Function to execute)
Setting means for setting a switching mode between the third mode and the fourth mode of the second allocating unit based on the grasping result by the grasping unit (the processing of steps S2107 to S2114 by the main controller 81). Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the first allocating means is switched between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing, and the second allocating unit depends on the mode of the first allocating unit. A switching mode is set. That is, the first distribution means that performs a certain operation and the second distribution means that performs an irregular operation are linked. As a result, a plurality of sorting means that change the flow-down direction of the game ball, which are the first sorting means and the second sorting means, can be associated with each other. Therefore, the flow-down mode of the game ball can be various, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Feature I2. The gaming machine according to Feature I1, wherein the first allocating means is provided downstream of the second allocating means in the flow path of the game ball.

  According to the above configuration, by controlling the second distribution means, the first distribution means on the downstream side is also controlled. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the flow-down mode of game balls using a plurality of distribution means while simplifying the control configuration.

Feature I3. A predetermined passing portion (V winning port 182a) is provided on the downstream side of the first distribution means in the flow path of the game ball,
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the predetermined passing portion, privilege granting means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening / closing execution mode or round continuation) to the player. The gaming machine according to Feature I2, further comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the player can obtain a privilege if the game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion after being sorted by each sorting means. In this case, each of the allocating means arranged upstream of the predetermined passing portion can be periodically operated, and the other can be irregularly operated. While the fairness of the game is ensured by the distribution means side (first distribution means side) performed, the privilege grant rate is determined by the distribution means side (second distribution means side) where irregular operations are performed It becomes possible to adjust. Therefore, interest can be improved.

  Feature I4. As the flow-down path to the predetermined passage portion, the path from the first allocating means is shorter than the path from the second allocating means, and the first allocating means and the second allocating path. The gaming machine according to Feature I3, wherein a position with the means is set.

  According to the above configuration, the distribution means on the side where the periodic operation is performed is arranged at a position closer to the predetermined passing portion. Therefore, it is difficult to give an unfair feeling to the player.

  Feature I5. The flow path of the game ball is determined so that the predetermined passing portion can be reached regardless of whether the first distribution unit distributes the first direction or the second direction. The gaming machine according to Feature I3 or Feature I4.

  According to the above configuration, even if the regular distribution by the first distribution unit is performed, the predetermined passing portion can be reached, and thus the fairness of the game is easily ensured.

In order to clarify the significance of the distribution by the first distribution means,
“The arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is set to be relatively high in the case of being distributed in the first direction and in the case of being distributed in the second direction.” Also good.

Feature I6. The arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is set to be relatively high and low when distributed in the first direction and when distributed in the second direction,
The setting means sets the second distribution means based on the grasping result of the grasping means so that the first distribution means distributes in a direction with a lower arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion. The gaming machine according to Feature I5, wherein the gaming machine can be performed.

  According to the said structure, if it distributes to the side with the high arrival rate to a predetermined | prescribed passage part, it will be thought that it is delightful as a player. On the other hand, as described in the feature I5, the predetermined passing portion can be reached regardless of which direction is assigned. Therefore, whether the predetermined passing portion is reached or not when the arrival rate is high. The pleasure of watching the operation mode of the game ball such as this can be reduced. Therefore, by setting the distribution by the second distribution means as described above, it is possible to fully enjoy the game whether or not a privilege can be obtained depending on the operation mode of the game ball.

  Feature I7. It is set such that the side having a low arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is set to have higher visibility from the front of the gaming machine than the side having a high arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion. The gaming machine according to feature I6.

  According to the said structure, the pleasure which sees the operation | movement aspect of a game ball can be exhibited more effectively.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Variable receiving means provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received than the first state ( An accessory device 150);
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (function for executing game control processing by the main control device 81);
A first passage part (V winning path 191a) and a second passage part (outward passage 191b) through which the game balls accepted by the variable acceptance means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage part, a privilege granting means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player;
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side (a position at which the game balls are easily led to the V winning side by the rotating body 201), and the first mode than the first mode. Distributing means (rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing to the second mode that is difficult to be distributed to the passing portion side (position that is easy to be led out by the rotating body 201),
Grasping means (function of executing the process of step S2105 by the main control device 81) for grasping the switching state between the first aspect and the second aspect by grasping the distribution means;
Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (the entrance to the operating ports 38, 39 has occurred, the opening waiting time has ended, the fluctuation display time has ended, etc.) Then, a game state transition means (main state) capable of shifting to a specific state in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means can be executed a predetermined number of times (a state in which processing during control is performed based on a normal release result or the like) A function of executing game control processing by the control device 81),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state switching control that enables the reception to the variable receiving means is performed. Then, when the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, the grasping means grasps the status of the sorting member that determines whether or not it passes through the first passage, and the state switching control is performed in consideration of the grasping result of the grasping means. Therefore, for example, it can be made easy to pass through the first passage part, or it can be made difficult to pass through the first passage part. Therefore, the game is designed as designed by the gaming machine designer, and the management of the game rate can be suitably executed.

Feature J2. The gaming state transition means includes
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the first timing at which the game ball received by the variable receiving means easily reaches the sorting means in the situation where the sorting means is in the first mode (V distribution is A first state switching control mode in which the variable receiving means is in the first state (opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that V distribution is easy to be performed). ,
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the second timing (V distribution is less likely) that the game ball received by the variable receiving means is difficult to reach the sorting means in the situation where the sorting means is in the first mode. A second state switching control mode in which the variable receiving means is in the first state (open / close control of the open / close accessory 168 to make it difficult to perform V distribution), ,
The gaming machine according to J1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to the specific state including any of the above.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not the game ball is received by the variable receiving means based on the grasping result by the grasping means includes the period required for the game ball received by the variable receiving means to reach the distributing means. Is done. If it does in this way, it can be set as a ball as designed by the designer.

  Feature J3. The grasping means grasps the position of the allocating means or the period from the previous switching timing (detection result by the rotational position detection sensor 196), thereby switching the first mode and the second mode. The gaming machine according to Feature J1 or Feature J2, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of grasping the above.

  According to the above configuration, the grasping means can achieve the excellent effect of J1 with a simple structure such as grasping the position from the sorting means or the period from the switching timing of the previous sorting means.

  Feature J4. The grasping means, when the game ball is received by the variable receiving means during the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to grasp an aspect of the allocating unit at a timing when it reaches the allocating unit.

  According to the above configuration, even if the game ball is received at any timing during the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state, the mode of the distribution means at the timing when the game ball reaches the distribution means Since it can be grasped, the distribution rate by the distribution means can be determined more accurately.

Feature J5. The allocating means has a rotating body that rotates at least at a predetermined period;
The grasping means has a detection sensor that detects the position of the rotating body, and is configured to be able to grasp the position of the rotating body at least for the rotating body based on the detection result of the detection sensor. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4.

  According to the said structure, the existing structure can be diverted suitably and the outstanding effect as described in said J1 can be show | played.

Feature J6. The distribution unit includes a first distribution unit (distribution members 300 and 310) and a second distribution unit (rotary body 201) as a plurality of distribution units,
The first distribution means is disposed upstream of the second distribution means,
The first passage portion and the second passage portion are disposed downstream of the second distribution means;
The grasping means is configured to be able to grasp any position of the first assigning means and the second assigning means or a period from the previous switching timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the grasping result of the second allocating means is prioritized over the grasping result.

  According to the above configuration, the distribution status at a position closer to the first passage or the second passage can be determined by giving priority to the downstream grasp result. As a result, it is possible to set the state switching control of the variable receiving means that takes into account the privilege grant rate based on the passage to the first passage portion more accurately.

Feature J7. The distribution unit includes a first distribution unit (distribution members 300 and 310) and a second distribution unit (rotary body 201) as a plurality of distribution units,
The first distribution means is disposed upstream of the second distribution means,
The first passage portion and the second passage portion are disposed downstream of the second distribution means;
When the game balls are distributed by the first distribution means, the game balls can be led out to the first passage without passing through the second distribution means.
Even if the grasping means grasps that the first assigning means can be assigned to the first passage section side, the grasping means can determine whether the second assigning means is the first aspect and the second aspect. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, characterized by grasping a switching situation.

  According to the above configuration, even if the situation can be assigned to the first passing section side by the first allocating means, if the situation of the second allocating means is grasped, the state switching control of the variable receiving means can be performed. Regarding the setting, it is possible to reflect the situation of the second distribution means. In this way, it is possible to perform more various state switching control settings.

Feature J8. The distribution unit includes a first distribution unit (distribution members 300 and 310) and a second distribution unit (rotary body 201) as a plurality of distribution units,
The second distribution means is disposed at a position where visibility from the player is higher than that of the first distribution means,
When it is determined by the grasping means that the game state transition means can be distributed to the first passing section side by either the first distribution means or the second distribution means, 8. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, wherein the state switching control can be set so that the state switching control can be performed by the distribution means toward the first passage unit side.

  According to the above configuration, as a player, it is possible to confirm that the player has been sorted by the sorting means (second sorting means) on the higher visibility side. Therefore, the feature J1 is wonderful, based on the original enjoyment of the gaming machine, such as enjoying the operation of the game ball, not simply from the point of passing through the first passing part (provided that a privilege is granted). An effect can be produced.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Distributing means that can be switched between a first mode in which game balls flowing down the game area are distributed in a first direction and a second mode in which the game balls are distributed in a second direction different from the first direction (opening / closing accessory 168) When,
A predetermined passing portion (V winning port 182a) provided on the downstream side of the distributing means in the flow path of the game ball;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the predetermined passing portion, privilege granting means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening / closing execution mode or round continuation) to the player. Function to execute)
With
The flow path of the game ball is determined so that the predetermined passing part can be reached regardless of whether the distribution unit distributes the first direction or the second direction.
The arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is set to be relatively high and low when distributed in the first direction and when distributed in the second direction,
When the distribution unit distributes the arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion to the higher side, the change means to change the distribution rate to the lower arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion (a first control by the main controller 81). 2) a gaming machine having a function of executing an opening / closing timing change process.

  According to the said structure, a privilege is provided to a player by a game ball passing a predetermined passage part, and the distribution means is provided in the upstream of the predetermined passage part, and according to the distribution direction The flow path is set so that the arrival rate to the predetermined passage is relatively high. In such a configuration, it is considered that the player wishes to be distributed to the side having a high arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion. However, if it is possible to reach the predetermined passing portion regardless of whether it is distributed, it is determined whether or not it reaches the predetermined passing portion if it is distributed to the side where the arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is low It is possible to taste a thrilling feeling. In that regard, as in the above configuration, if there is a means to change the reach to the low side when it is distributed to the high arrival rate, such a flow of gaming balls can be fully enjoyed. Can be used to improve interest.

  Feature K2. It is set such that the side having a low arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is set to have higher visibility from the front of the gaming machine than the side having a high arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion. The gaming machine according to feature K1.

  According to the said structure, the pleasure which sees the operation | movement aspect of a game ball can be exhibited more effectively.

  In addition, the technical idea shown in each invention of each of the features A to K described above may be applied to each invention of each of the features A to K. You may apply with respect to each invention of K group. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the inventions of the features A to K.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 24 ... Game board, 38 ... 1st operation port, 39 ... 2nd operation port, 51 ... Symbol display device, 60 ... Launching handle, 81 ... Main control device, 82 ... Production control device, 150 ... Role Object device, 168 ... Opening / closing accessory, 182a ... V prize opening, 182b ... Outage opening, 192 ... V prize winning sensor, 193 ... Removal sensor, 300 ... First distribution member, 300a ... First distribution drive unit, 310 ... 2nd distribution member, 310a ... 2nd distribution drive part, A ... special opening, B ... special opening.

Claims (10)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
Variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can be received and a second state in which the game ball is less likely to be received than the first state;
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means based on occurrence of a predetermined event;
A first passing portion and a second passing portion through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage part, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player;
In the first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage unit side and the second mode in which the game balls are less easily distributed to the first passage unit side than the first mode, A sorting means capable of switching at a predetermined timing;
With
The variable acceptance control means includes
First switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a first timing based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied when the predetermined event occurs;
Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied when the predetermined event occurs. When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
Variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can be received and a second state in which the game ball is less likely to be received than in the first state;
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means based on occurrence of a predetermined event;
A first passage portion and a second passage portion through which a game ball accepted by the variable acceptance means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage part, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player;
In the first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage unit side and the second mode in which the game balls are less easily distributed to the first passage unit side than the first mode, A sorting means capable of switching at a predetermined timing;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, gaming state transition means capable of shifting the state switching control of the variable receiving means to a specific state that can be executed a predetermined number of times, and
With
The specific state is a configuration for performing the next state switching control based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first passage unit in the one state switching control,
The variable acceptance control means includes
First switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a first timing in the specific state based on the first condition being satisfied when the predetermined event occurs;
When the predetermined event occurs, the state switching control is executed at a second timing different from the first timing in the specific state based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Two switching execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
Variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can be received and a second state in which the game ball is less likely to be received than the first state;
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means based on occurrence of a predetermined event;
A first passing portion and a second passing portion through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage part, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player;
In the first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage unit side and the second mode in which the game balls are less easily distributed to the first passage unit side than the first mode, A sorting means capable of switching at a predetermined timing;
A game capable of shifting the specific control in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times to a special game state that can be executed a plurality of times based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. State transition means;
With
In the special game state, in the one specific control, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage portion, it is possible to perform the next specific control,
The variable acceptance control means includes
A first switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a first timing based on the first condition being satisfied during the specific control;
A second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied during the specific control;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing. .   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein a plurality of the distributing means are provided on a flow path of one game ball.   As each of the plurality of distribution means provided in plural, a first distribution means visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a second distribution means whose visibility from the front of the gaming machine is lower than the first distribution means The gaming machine according to claim 5, further comprising: The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it comprises a game state transition means capable of shifting the state switching control of the variable receiving means to a specific state that can be executed a predetermined number of times.
The gaming state transition means is a special gaming state in which the specific control in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times based on the establishment of the predetermined condition can be executed a plurality of times. To be transferred to
In the special game state, in the one specific control, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage portion, it is possible to perform the next specific control,
7. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein in the one specific control, the first condition is set so as to be easily established at a timing later than the second condition. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it comprises a game state transition means capable of shifting the state switching control of the variable receiving means to a specific state that can be executed a predetermined number of times.
The gaming state transition means is a special gaming state in which the specific control in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times based on the establishment of the predetermined condition can be executed a plurality of times. To be transferred to
In the special game state, in the one specific control, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage portion, it is possible to perform the next specific control,
In each of the specific controls in the special gaming state, comprising: setting means for setting whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the start of the specific control;
The setting means is characterized in that, in the state switching control at the first predetermined number of times in each of the specific controls, the first condition can be more easily established than the second condition. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it comprises a game state transition means capable of shifting the state switching control of the variable receiving means to a specific state that can be executed a predetermined number of times.
The gaming state transition means is a special gaming state in which the specific control in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times based on the establishment of the predetermined condition can be executed a plurality of times. To be transferred to
In the special game state, in the one specific control, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passage portion, it is possible to perform the next specific control,
In each state switching control, either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied,
9. The state switching control of the second predetermined number of times in each of the state switching controls is set so that the second condition is more easily established than the first condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.   The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the first condition is set so that the first condition is more easily established than the second condition in the next state switching control of the second predetermined number of times.